JP6224571B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball on a game board surface.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a message prompting a player to perform a predetermined operation such as a long press operation (continuous pressing operation for a predetermined time or more) on an operation button is displayed while a special symbol is changing or a special game is being executed. In some cases, the player performs a predetermined effect by performing a predetermined operation such as a long press operation on the operation button during the operation reception valid period.

JP 2010-172737 A JP 2014-117351 A

  In a conventional gaming machine that performs a predetermined effect after performing a predetermined operation such as a long press operation, it is required that the player can enjoy the game more by operating buttons.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a highly entertaining gaming machine in which a player can perform a predetermined operation such as a long press operation on an operation means such as an operation button and the player can enjoy more by operating the operation means. For the purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, the invention according to claim 1
A main control unit for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting a command according to the progress of the game;
An effect control unit that determines an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit, and causes the effect device to execute the determined effect;
An operation means that can be operated by the player and that detects an operation status related to the operation by the player;
An operation control means for processing the operation status detected from the operation means as operation information,
The operation information is information that can at least determine that the operation means is operated,
The production control unit is a gaming machine characterized in that when at least the operation information indicates that the operation means is operated by a player, the operation information is processed in association with an operation time. .

  Here, in the present invention, the “operation means” includes at least an operation button, a lever, a handle, a grip, a rotation member, a slide member, a touch panel, and an optical sensor. In addition, “operation” with respect to the operation means is an operation in which the player pushes (presses), pulls, tilts (rotates), rotates, slides, touches, or holds the hand. Various operations according to the configuration of the means are included.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible for a player to perform a predetermined operation such as a long press operation on an operation means such as an operation button, and the player can enjoy more enjoyment by operating the operation means. A gaming machine can be provided.

It is a front view which shows an example of the game machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control mechanism of the game machine attached to the back side of a game board. It is the block diagram which showed typically the main function structure in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the game state in a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of main operation | movement in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a 1st start port switch process and a 2nd start port switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a gate switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a special game determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the process during a stop. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a big prize opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a big prize opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a normal symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an electric chew (electric tulip) process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an output process. It is a block diagram schematically showing the main functional configuration of the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the example of the waveform of the signal output from an operation button, and the example of the processing content of a signal sampled in the timer interruption process, and a result. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect pattern selection table. It is a timing chart of the 1st scenario production pattern defined in the scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of a 1st step effect (a title display and a 1st step scenario progress effect) based on a 1st scenario effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the concept of the process in a 1st step scenario progress effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a waveform of the operation signal output from the operation button in the single stroke pushing operation reception valid period in a 1st step scenario progress effect period. It is a figure showing one mode of suggestion production based on the 1st scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation pattern with respect to the operation button in a suggestion effect, and a serif effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a waveform of the operation signal output from the operation button in the single press operation reception valid period in the suggestion production period. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the 2nd step scenario progress effect in the 2nd step effect based on a 1st scenario effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the successful production in a 2nd step production. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the production | presentation in which the revival production | generation is performed after the failure production | presentation in a 2nd step production and a failure production. It is a figure which shows the example of a waveform of the operation signal output from the operation button in the long press operation reception valid period in a 2nd step production period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st scenario progress effect control process based on a 1st scenario effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st step effect control process of a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st step scenario effect progress process of a 1st step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st step scenario effect progress process of a 1st step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the 1st step scenario effect control progression process of a 1st step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the 1st step scenario effect progress process of a 1st step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the 1st step scenario progress effect control process based on a 1st scenario effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect control process in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the serif effect execution process in an suggestion effect progress process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 2nd stage effect control process of a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern A in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern A in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the final result alerting | reporting effect execution process in a 2nd step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern B in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern C in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern D in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern D in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern E in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern E in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario effect progress process based on the 1st scenario effect pattern F in a 1st scenario progress effect control process. It is a timing chart of the 2nd Nario production pattern defined in the scenario production pattern. It is a figure explaining the scenario progress effect based on a 2nd scenario effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the concept of the process in the 1st step production based on a 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the title display based on a 2nd scenario production pattern, and a 1st step production (a title display and a 1st step scenario progress production). It is a figure showing one mode of suggestion production based on the 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure showing one mode of suggestion production based on the 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure showing one mode of suggestion production based on the 2nd scenario production pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the gauge progress degree and expectation degree in suggestion production, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the display color of the power accumulation amount and expectation degree in suggestion production. It is a figure which shows an example of a gauge progress pattern decision table (with the transition to a special game state). It is a figure which shows an example of a gauge progress pattern decision table (no transition to a special game state). It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the 2nd stage production based on a 2nd scenario production pattern, a success production, and a failure production. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a 2nd scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st step effect control process of a 2nd scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st step scenario effect progress process of a 1st step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st step scenario effect progress process of a 1st step effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect control process in a 2nd scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception valid period concerning suggestion effect progress processing, and a change of the effect mode of the effect screen according to this. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a figure for demonstrating immediately preceding determination timing. It is a figure which shows an example of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception valid period concerning suggestion effect progress processing, and a change of the effect mode of the effect screen according to this. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 2nd step effect control process of a 2nd scenario progress effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception valid period concerning suggestion effect progress processing, and a change of the effect mode of the effect screen according to this. It is a flowchart which shows the further another example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the further another example of the suggestion effect progress process in an suggestion effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception valid period concerning suggestion effect progress processing, and a change of the effect mode of the effect screen according to this.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, members that are common to each other are denoted by the same reference numerals, and duplicate descriptions thereof are omitted.

◇ Overall configuration of gaming machine ◇
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. This gaming machine 1 is a bullet-type gaming machine configured to pay out a winning ball when a gaming ball launched by a player's instruction operation enters a winning opening provided in various winning devices. Further, the gaming machine 1 is configured to determine whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that a game ball launched by an instruction operation by the player enters a predetermined area. This is a gaming machine that performs an auxiliary game that assists a game ball to easily enter a predetermined area under a predetermined condition in order to enhance the interest of the game. Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 has a gaming machine main body 1a fixed to an island facility of a hall (store), and a transparent glass plate 2 is fitted on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1a. A front frame door 3 is provided. The gaming machine main body 1 a includes a gaming board 10 that rolls gaming balls inside the front frame door 3.

  The front frame door 3 is pivotally supported at the left end of the gaming machine main body 1a so that the front side of the gaming machine main body 1a can be opened and closed. The transparent glass plate 2 is for making the gaming board 10 attached to the inside of the gaming machine main body 1a visible while the front frame door 3 closes the front side of the gaming machine main body 1a. In addition, a shelf-shaped sphere storage unit 4 that protrudes to the front side is provided at the lower center of the front frame door 3. On the upper surface of the ball storage section 4, an operation button 6 that can be operated by the player is provided, and a storage tray for storing a game ball for launching on the game board 10 is provided.

  The operation button 6 includes a movable body 6a and an operation button switch 6b (see FIG. 2). The movable body 6a is a portion operated by the player, and is fixed to the upper surface of the ball storage portion 4 in an urging state so as to be movable up and down. That is, the movable body 6a is in a fixed position when no operation is performed by the player, and is movable when operated by the player. On the other hand, the movable body 6a returns to the home position when the player's operation on the movable body 6a is released. The operation button switch 6b outputs a signal corresponding to the position of the movable body 6a. The operation button switch 6b is, for example, an optical sensor, and outputs a high level signal indicating a switch-on state when the movable body 6a is operated. On the other hand, when the movable body 6a is not operated and is in a fixed position, the switch A low level signal indicating an off state is output. Such operation signals SGN such as a switch-on signal and a switch-off signal are sent to the effect control board 33.

  Further, the front frame door 3 includes a handle lever 5 that can be rotated in the clockwise direction in order to allow the player to fire the game ball at the lower right portion of the ball storage unit 4. Further, the front frame door 3 includes a frame lamp 9 arranged so as to surround the periphery of the transparent glass plate 2, and on the left and right sides of the frame lamp 9 positioned above the transparent glass plate 2 as the game progresses. A speaker 8 is provided for performing sound output for various effects.

  When the front frame door 3 is in a closed state, the game board 10 forms a game area where the game ball can roll between the board surface and the transparent glass plate 2 fitted in the front frame door 3. When the handle lever 5 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the upper left part of the game area with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle, and then the game ball flows down while rolling in the game area. When the game ball wins various winning holes provided on the game board 10, the gaming machine 1 pays out the prize ball to the storage tray of the ball storage unit 4.

  In the center of the game board 10, a center accessory 11 for performing various effects as the game progresses is provided. The center accessory 11 is provided with an image display 12 such as a color liquid crystal display disposed so as to be positioned substantially in the center of the game board 10. The image display 12 displays a main effect image when a game effect is performed in the gaming machine 1. The center accessory 11 includes a movable accessory 14 on the upper part of the image display 12. The movable accessory 14 is an accessory (gimmick) that can be operated when a predetermined effect is performed in the gaming machine 1. The movable accessory 14 has, for example, letters “ABC” and various other decorations on the surface side, and incorporates a plurality of LEDs that emit light of different colors inside. That is, the movable accessory 14 is configured to include a panel lamp 14a that can emit a decorative portion such as a character “ABC” in various colors. Further, the center accessory 11 includes a sub-display 13 having a display screen size smaller than that of the image display 12 below the image display 12. The sub display 13 is configured by a color liquid crystal display or the like, for example, like the image display 12. The sub-display 13 displays a secondary effect image related to the effect image displayed on the image display 12 when a game effect is performed in the gaming machine 1, or the image display 12 An independent effect image that is not related to the effect image displayed in is displayed. The sub display 13 can also display a main effect image in place of the image display 12.

  The game board 10 also has a first start port 15, a second start port 16, a first big prize port 17, a second big prize port 18, and a through hole in addition to a large number of nails and windmills around the center actor 11. Known members such as a gate 20 and an out port 21 are provided. In addition to this, the game board 10 is also provided with a normal winning opening not shown. Further, the game board 10 displays a special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the special game determination (big hit determination) by displaying a variation of the special symbol on the lower left part of the board surface outside the game area where the game ball rolls. The number of holds due to winning a game ball is displayed at the first start port 15 and the second start port 16, or the normal symbol lottery result when the game ball passes through the through gate 20 is displayed. For this purpose, a symbol display 22 is provided.

  In the game board 10 shown in FIG. 1, a through gate 20 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 11. The through gate 20 is a gate which is a condition for the normal symbol lottery to be performed in the gaming machine 1, and when the game ball passes this gate, the normal symbol lottery is performed in the gaming machine 1.

  The first start port 15 is provided below the center accessory 11, and the second start port 16 is provided on the right side of the first start port 15. Here, a game ball having a relatively high possibility of winning in the first starting port 15 is a game ball that rolls on the left side of the center accessory 11 as indicated by an arrow F1. It is. That is, the first start port 15 is provided so that the possibility that the game ball rolling on the right side of the center accessory 11 wins the first start port 15 as shown by the arrow F2 is extremely low. A game ball with a relatively high possibility of winning at the second starting port 16 is a game ball that rolls on the right side of the center accessory 11 as indicated by an arrow F2 when the game ball is launched on the game board 10. . In other words, the second start port 16 is provided so that the possibility that the game ball rolling on the left side of the center accessory 11 wins the second start port 16 as shown by an arrow F1 is extremely low.

  Each of the first start port 15 and the second start port 16 is a winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, and whether or not a special game advantageous to the player in the gaming machine 1 is performed. It is a winning opening as a condition for performing a game determination (a jackpot determination). When the game balls won in the start ports 15 and 16 pass through a start detection area (not shown) and a start condition is satisfied, a special game determination is performed in the gaming machine 1. When the special game determination is made in the gaming machine 1, the special symbol variation display is started on the symbol display 22, and the effect corresponding to the result of the special game determination is started also in the center accessory 11 or the like. For example, in the image display 12, a symbol variation effect is started that varies the three decorative symbols 12a, 12b, and 12c in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. When a predetermined time elapses after the special symbol variation display is started, the special symbol variation display on the symbol display 22 and the symbol variation effect on the center accessory 11 are finished, and the result of the special game determination is given to the player. Is displayed. If the result of the special game determination displayed at this time indicates that a predetermined winning such as a big win is won, the gaming machine 1 thereafter starts a special game advantageous to the player.

  The symbol display 22 is arranged at the corner of the game board 10 and is provided at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. When the special symbol variation display is terminated and the result of the special game determination is displayed, the jackpot is displayed. It is displayed in such a display manner that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is a win. On the other hand, the image display 12 or the like displays in a display mode in which the player can easily determine whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit. Therefore, the player recognizes the result of the special game determination or the like based on the result of the symbol variation effect performed mainly by the center accessory 11 or the like. Then, the player advances the game while visually recognizing various effects performed by the center accessory 11.

  The 2nd starting port 16 is provided with the electric tulip 16a which opens and closes in the left-right direction on the right-and-left both sides. The electric tulip 16 a is an auxiliary member that assists the winning of the game ball to the second start port 16. In other words, the electric tulip 16 a assists the game ball rolling to a position in the vicinity of the second starting port 16 to easily win the second starting port 16 in the open state opened in the left-right direction. On the other hand, when the electric tulip 16a is in a closed state in which both the left and right sides of the second start port 16 are closed, an auxiliary function for assisting winning in the second start port 16 does not act. It becomes difficult to win a prize. Such an electric tulip 16a wins a normal symbol lottery performed when a game ball passes through the through gate 20, so that an opening time corresponding to the gaming state at that time is set, and the closed state is changed to the opened state. And is driven a predetermined number of times.

  The first grand prize winning port 17 is provided further to the right of the second starting port 16 in the game board 10. The first big winning opening 17 is a first variable winning device that is driven into an open state in which game balls can be won and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is normally in a closed state. Then, in the gaming machine 1, when a special game determination is made by winning a game ball in the first start port 15 or the second start port 16, a predetermined round of a special game that is started after that is won. , The first grand prize winning port 17 is driven to the open state, and the game ball can enter the first grand prize winning port 17. When the first big winning opening 17 is opened, the open state continues until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number of winnings are counted. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 17 is in an open state, it is possible to win up to a predetermined number of game balls until a predetermined time elapses, whereby the player can acquire a prize ball. it can. Then, the first grand prize winning port 17 driven to the open state returns to the closed state when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined number of winnings are counted.

  However, in the round in which the first grand prize opening 17 is opened, the opening time during which the first big prize opening 17 is kept open is determined according to the type of winning in the special game determination, for example, 30 seconds. There are two types: a round set for a relatively long time (long open round) and a round set for an extremely short time of about 0.2 seconds (short open round). Therefore, the round in which the player can win a lot of prize balls is the long open round. In the case of the short open round, it is difficult to win the game balls at the first big winning opening 17 being opened, It is difficult to acquire.

  The second big prize opening 18 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 11. The second large winning opening 18 is also a second variable winning device that is driven to an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is normally in a closed state. . Then, in the gaming machine 1, when a special game determination is made in a special game determination performed on the condition that a game ball is won at the first start port 15 or the second start port 16, a special game to be started thereafter is determined in advance. In the second round, the second grand prize opening 18 is driven to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 18. When the second big prize opening 18 is opened, the open state continues until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number of winnings are counted. Therefore, when the second grand prize winning opening 18 is in an open state, it is possible to win a predetermined number of game balls until a predetermined time elapses, whereby the player can acquire a prize ball. it can. And the 2nd big winning opening 18 driven to the open state returns to the closed state when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined number of winnings are counted. Note that the game ball that has won the second grand prize opening 18 is discharged to the back side of the game board 10 through the prize detection port 19 provided in the center accessory 11.

  In the round in which the second big prize opening 18 is opened, the opening time for maintaining the open state of the second big prize opening 18 is also set to a relatively long time of, for example, about 30 seconds like the first big prize opening 17. There are two types of rounds (long open rounds) and rounds (short open rounds) set at an extremely short time of about 0.2 seconds. A round in which a player can win many prize balls is a long open round. In the case of a short open round, it is difficult to win a game ball in the open second big prize opening 18 and win a prize ball. It is difficult.

  In the special game, a round game that selectively drives one of the first grand prize winning port 17 and the second big prize winning port 18 to the open state is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Therefore, the first grand prize winning port 17 and the second grand prize winning port 18 are not simultaneously opened. And the special game in which the round game that opens the first grand prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is performed a plurality of times gives the player an opportunity to obtain more prize balls than usual. Since it is a game, it becomes a game state (special game state) that is particularly advantageous for the player.

  However, even if the round game that opens the first grand prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is performed a plurality of times, all of the plurality of times may be a short opening round. If all rounds are short open rounds, it is practically difficult for the player to win a prize ball during the special game. Therefore, when such a special game is performed, for example, by shifting the game state after the end of the special game to a game state advantageous to the player, a game value advantageous to the player is given. Composed.

  The out port 21 is provided at the lowermost center of the game board 10 and discharges a game ball that has not won any of the above-described various winning ports to the back side of the game board 10 as an out ball. It is.

  Next, FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control mechanism of the gaming machine 1 attached to the back side of the gaming board 10. On the back side of the gaming board 10, a main control board 30 that controls the main operation of the gaming machine 1 and a sub control board 31 that controls each part based on signals and commands output from the main control board 30 are provided. ing. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the sub control board 31 includes a payout control board 32, an effect control board 33, an image control board 34, a lamp control board 35, and the like.

  The main control board 30 includes a CPU 30a, a ROM 30b, and a RAM 30c. The main control board 30 includes a first start port switch 41 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start port 15 and a second start port switch for detecting that the game ball has won the second start port 16. 42, a through gate switch 43 for detecting that a game ball has passed through the through gate 20, an electric Chu solenoid 44 for opening and closing the electric tulip 16a, a first big winning port solenoid 45 for opening and closing the first big winning port 17, and a second The first grand prize port switch 46 that detects that a game ball has won the first grand prize port 17, the second grand prize port solenoid 47 that opens and closes the second grand prize port 18, and the second grand prize port 18 Each of the second large prize opening switches 48 for detecting that a game ball has won is connected. A symbol display 22 is connected to the main control board 30. The symbol display 22 is provided with a special symbol display 22a for displaying the variation of the special symbol and a normal symbol display 22b for displaying the variation of the normal symbol.

  The main control board 30 is a payout control board when each of the first start opening switch 41, the second start opening switch 42, the first big prize opening switch 46 and the second big prize opening switch 48 detects a winning of a game ball. A prize ball command is sent to 32. The payout control board 32 includes a CPU 32a, a ROM 32b, and a RAM 32c, and is configured to control a payout motor 32d provided on the back side of the game board 10. When a prize ball command is input from the main control board 30, A predetermined number of balls are paid out in accordance with the winning opening.

  The main control board 30 is configured to perform a special game determination for determining whether or not to perform a special game and a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric tulip 16a. For example, when a game ball passes through the through gate 20, the main control board 30 performs a normal symbol lottery for determining whether to open or close the electric tulip 16a, and displays a normal symbol based on the result of the normal symbol lottery. The change display of the normal symbol in the device 22b is started. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the main control board 30 stops the normal symbol variation display at the winning symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time, and then drives the electric chow solenoid 44 for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times to make the electric tulip 16a. Open. Note that when the normal symbol lottery is won and the electric tulip 16a is in an open state, the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 16 as described above. This is an advantageous gaming state.

  Further, the main control board 30 detects that the game ball has won the first start port 15 or the second start port 16 and, when the start condition is satisfied, makes a special game determination according to the winning start port. Then, the special symbol display 22a starts displaying the variation of the special symbol for a predetermined time based on the result of the special game determination. Then, the main control board 30 causes the effect control board 33 to perform the symbol change effect for a predetermined time according to the result of the special game determination as the special symbol display 22a starts the change display of the special symbol. In response, signals and commands are sent.

  In addition, when it is detected that the game ball has won the first start port 15 or the second start port 16 and the change display of the previous special symbol is not finished, the main control board 30 displays the special symbol associated with the winning. Hold the variable display of. Then, when it is time to finish the display of the variation of the previous special symbol and start the next variation display, the main control board 30 performs the next special game determination by digesting the hold, and the special game determination Based on the result, the special symbol variation display is started.

  If the main control board 30 is determined to win a predetermined hit in the special game determination, the special control variation display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time, and then a special game corresponding to the type of the win is started. In each round during the special game, the first grand prize opening solenoid 45 or the second big prize opening solenoid 47 is selectively driven to the open state so that the first big prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is opened. Open. The main control board 30 sends a signal or a command to cause the effect control board 33 to perform a special game effect corresponding to the special game as the special game is started.

  The production control board 33 includes a CPU 33a, a ROM 33b, a RAM 33c, and an RTC 33d, and specific production contents performed in the gaming machine 1 based on signals and commands from the main control board 30, an operation signal SGN from the operation button 6, and the like. And the execution of the determined effect is controlled. That is, the effect control board 33 controls each of the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 to execute an effect based on the determined specific effect contents. The RTC 33d is a clock circuit that is a real-time clock and can output time information indicating the correct current date and time.

  For example, when the special game determination is performed by the main control board 30 and the special symbol variation display is performed for a predetermined time, the effect control board 33 displays the three decorative symbols 12a and 12b on the image display 12 during the predetermined time. , 12c is changed. In this symbol variation effect, the three decorative symbols 12a, 12b, and 12c are simply a normal symbol variation effect in which the up and down direction is changed, and various notice effects in which characters appear from such a normal symbol variation effect. Various effects are performed according to the result of the special game determination, such as an effect of transitional development. In addition, the operation button switch 6 b of the operation button 6 is connected to the effect control board 33. The operation button switch 6b outputs a low level signal when the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is not operated, and outputs a high level signal when the movable body 6a is operated. Such an output signal is sampled at predetermined intervals in a timer interrupt process by the operation control unit 66 of the control board 33 described later, for example. The operation control unit 66 can process an operation state for the operation button 6 as operation information based on an output signal from the operation button switch 6b. Then, the effect control unit 65 of the control board 33 can determine whether or not a predetermined operation, for example, a single press operation, a continuous press operation, or a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in a predetermined period. It is. Therefore, the effect control unit 65 can cause the effect device 36 to perform an effect corresponding to the operation content for the operation button 6. In addition, since the production control board 33 includes the RTC 33d, the production to be performed in the gaming machine 1 can be switched or changed according to the current date and time.

  When a special game is played by the main control board 30, the effect control board 33 controls the execution of the special game effect corresponding to the winning type won in the special game determination.

  The image control board 34 includes a CPU 34 a, a ROM 34 b, a RAM 34 c, and a VRAM 34 d, and controls images to be displayed on the image display 12 and the sub display 13 constituting the rendering device 36. The image control board 34 starts a design change effect for changing the three decorative symbols 12a, 12b, and 12c on the image display 12 based on an instruction from the effect control board 33 (effect control unit 65). Change production to reach production or make various development productions. Further, the image control board 34 can display an effect image or the like related to such a symbol variation effect or the like on the sub-display 13 or output sound from the speaker 8. The image control board 34 displays a round of the current round during a special game or displays a special game effect image such as a moving image based on an instruction from the effect control board 33 (effect control unit 65). .

  The VRAM 34 d in the image control board 34 is a memory for writing an image to be displayed on the image display 12. The CPU 34a repeatedly executes various processes such as background image display processing, decorative symbol display processing, and character image display processing for each frame on the VRAM 34d, so that the image display 12 and the sub display 13 are A background image, a decorative design image, a character image, and the like can be displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can visually recognize the foreground image. Further, the image control board 34 generates a sound effect for production from the speaker 8. Therefore, the image control board 34 can output sound, music, sound effects, or the like corresponding to an image (moving image or the like) displayed on the image display 12 or the sub display 13 from the speaker 8.

  The lamp control board 35 includes a CPU 35a, a ROM 35b, and a RAM 35c, and controls each of the frame lamp 9 and the movable accessory 14 (the panel lamp 14a and the movable accessory driving unit 14b) constituting the rendering device 36. The lamp control board 35 turns on the frame lamp 9 based on an instruction from the effect control board 33, turns on the panel lamp 14a in a predetermined color, or drives the movable accessory driving unit 14b to move the movable accessory 14. Or operate.

  Each of the image display 12, the sub-display 13, the speaker 8, the frame lamp 9, the board surface lamp 14 a, and the movable accessory 14 can be easily perceived by the player as the game progresses in the gaming machine 1. An effect device 36 for performing various effects is configured. 2 illustrates the case where the effect control board 33, the image control board 34, and the lamp control board 35 are provided as separate boards. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect control board 33, the image control board, and the like. 34 and the lamp control board 35 may be configured as one production control board.

◇ Main control board 30 ◇
FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the main functional configuration of the main control board 30. The RAM 30c of the main control board 30 is provided with a game data storage unit 60 and a hold storage unit 61. The game data storage unit 60 stores various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and the like as game data. The various random numbers stored in the game data storage unit 60 are random numbers that can take values within a predetermined range, and the values are sequentially updated by a random number update unit (not shown). Therefore, the values of various random numbers differ depending on the timing at which game data is read from the game data storage unit 60. In the game data storage unit 60, normal symbol random numbers used for the normal symbol lottery are also stored as game data. On the other hand, the holding storage unit 61 is a storage area for temporarily storing and holding the game data read from the game data storage unit 60 by the game data acquisition unit 51 up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  In the ROM 30b of the main control board 30, a special game determination table 62 and a variation pattern table 63 are stored in advance. The special game determination table 62 is a table referred to for performing a special game determination. The special game determination table 62 includes a first table 62a and a second table 62b. The first table 62a is a table that is referred to when the probability that a special game is determined to be performed in the special game determination is a normal probability state in which the probability is a normal probability. The second table 62b is a table that is referred to when the probability that a special game is determined to be performed in the special game determination is a high probability state that is higher than the normal probability. In the first table 62a, a predetermined number of values are determined as winning values where the jackpot random number is a jackpot, and in the second table 62b, more values than the first table 62a are determined as winning values where the jackpot random number is a jackpot. ing.

  The variation pattern table 63 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation time related to the variation display of the special symbol when the special game determination is performed on the main control board 30. The variation pattern table 63 includes a plurality of tables (not shown) such as a table that is referred to when the jackpot random number is a predetermined hit and a table that is referred to when the reach random number indicates reach. Each of the plurality of tables included in the variation pattern table 63 is a table in which the variation time of the special symbol is associated with the variation pattern random number on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, by referring to the variation pattern table 63, it is possible to uniquely determine the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special game determination, the random number value of the reach random number, or the like.

  In such a variation pattern table 63, when it is determined that the special game determination is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined in advance so that a relatively long time such as 90 seconds or more of the special symbol is determined. ing. In addition, when it is determined that the game is lost in the special game determination, a variation pattern is determined in advance so that a relatively short variation time of, for example, less than 90 seconds is determined. However, even if the result of the special game determination is a loss, if the reach random number is a value indicating that a reach effect is performed, as in the case of jackpot, the comparison time of the special symbol, for example, 90 seconds or more is compared. It is a fluctuation pattern that a long time is determined.

  The CPU 30a of the main control board 30 functions as a game control unit 50 that comprehensively controls the state and operation of the gaming machine 1 and advances the game. The game control unit 50 functions as various processing units, and FIG. 3 illustrates some of the functions. That is, the game control unit 50 switches the game state of the gaming machine 1 or advances the game, so that the game data acquisition unit 51, the special game determination unit 52, the special symbol variation control unit 53, and the special game control unit 54 functions.

  When the first start port switch 41 and the second start port switch 42 detect winning of a game ball, the game data acquisition unit 51 receives a jackpot random number, symbol random number, fluctuation from the game data storage unit 60 at that timing. Game data including a pattern random number and a reach random number is acquired. When the game data acquisition unit 51 acquires the game data by winning the first start port 15 or the second start port 16, the game data acquisition unit 51 stores the game data in the holding storage unit 61. The holding storage unit 61 stores a first holding storage unit 61a that stores game data acquired by winning the first start port 15 and a second storage that stores game data acquired by winning the second start port 16. A holding storage unit 61b, which distinguishes the game data acquired by winning the first start port 15 from the game data acquired by winning the second start port 16, and sets a predetermined upper limit number ( For example, up to four) can be stored. Therefore, the game data acquisition unit 51 stores the game data acquired by winning the first start port 15 in the first hold storage unit 61a and stores the game data acquired by winning the second start port 16 in the second hold. Store in the storage unit 61b. When the upper limit number of game data is already stored in each of the first hold storage unit 61a and the second hold storage unit 61b, the game data acquisition unit 51 discards the game data acquired from the game data storage unit 60. However, processing for storing game data is not performed.

  The special game determination unit 52 reads the game data stored in the hold storage unit 61 and in the hold state, and makes a special game determination based on the game data. That is, the special game determination unit 52 refers to the special game determination table 62 based on the jackpot random number included in the game data, and determines whether or not the jackpot random number matches the winning value of the jackpot. As described above, the special game determination table 62 includes the first table and the second table, and the special game determination unit 52 selects one of the first table and the second table according to the probability state at the time of reading the game data. Is selected, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number matches the winning value of the jackpot determined in the selected table. With such special game determination, winning or losing of game data read from the holding storage unit 61 is determined. The first table is a table whose probability of winning a jackpot is set to about 1/400, for example, and the second table has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the first table, for example, set to about 1/68. It is a table.

  The special game determination unit 52 does not read out the game data from the holding storage unit 61 when the special symbol variation control unit 53 displays the variation of the special symbol. In this case, at the timing when the special symbol variation display performed by the special symbol variation control unit 53 is completed and the next variation display can be performed, the special game determination unit 52 reads from the hold storage unit 61. The next game data is read out, and special game determination is performed based on the read out game data. At this time, if the game data is stored in the second holding storage unit 61b, the special game determination unit 52 reads the game data and performs the special game determination. That is, the special game determination unit 52 preferentially reads out the game data stored in the second hold storage unit 61b over the game data stored in the first hold storage unit 61a and performs the hold digest. It is configured as follows.

  When the special game determination is performed by the special game determination unit 52, the special symbol variation control unit 53 refers to the variation pattern table 63 based on the result of the special game determination, and determines the variation time of the special symbol. Controls the variation display of special symbols performed on the display 22a. The special symbol variation control unit 53 sends a variation start command to the effect control board 33 when the variation time of the special symbol is determined and the variation display of the special symbol is started. This variation start command includes information on the result of the special game determination, the variation time of the special symbol, and the like. Therefore, when the effect control board 33 receives the variation start command sent from the special symbol variation control unit 53, it responds to the result of the special game determination while the special symbol display is performed on the special symbol display 22a. It will be possible to perform the effect.

  The special game control unit 54 functions when a special game determination by the special game determination unit 52 is won in a predetermined win and it is determined to shift to a special game advantageous to the player. When the special game determination unit 52 determines that the special game control unit 54 is a predetermined hit, each of the first grand prize winning port 17 and the second big prize winning port 18 in the special gaming state performed accordingly. In addition to determining the number of rounds to be released and the opening pattern, the game state after the end of the special game is determined. Then, the special game control unit 54 starts a special game. When the special game control unit 54 starts the special game, each of the first grand prize port 17 and the second big prize port 18 is selected in each of a plurality of rounds based on the determined release pattern. By opening the first special winning opening, the first special winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is controlled to be opened during the special game.

  For example, the special game control unit 54 wins either the first start port 15 or the second start port 16 when determining the number of rounds and the opening pattern in the special game state, or the game state after the end of the special game. Different tables are referenced depending on whether the acquired game data is a big hit. For example, when it is determined that the game data stored in the first holding storage unit 61a is a big hit with the winning at the first starting port 15, the special game control unit 54 is stored in advance in the ROM 30b, for example. A first starting port table (not shown) is read and referred to, and the number of rounds and the opening pattern are determined based on the design random number included in the game data, and the game state after the end of the special game is determined. Further, when it is determined that the game data stored in the second holding storage unit 61b is a big hit with the winning at the second start port 16, the special game control unit 54 reads the second start port table. The number of rounds and the release pattern are determined based on the design random number included in the game data, and the game state after the special game is determined. That is, the special game control unit 54 determines the game state after the special game state is ended when it is determined that the special game determination is a big hit, and the determined game state after the special game state ends. It is comprised so that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 may be shifted to the next.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming machine 1 is activated in the normal gaming state ST1. The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the probability that it is determined that a special jackpot is won and a special game is determined in the special game determination is a normal probability, and the game is advanced with the normal probability. The normal game state ST1 is a relatively long predetermined time in which the normal symbol change time performed on the normal symbol display 22b is about 29 seconds when the game symbol passes through the through gate 20 and the normal symbol lottery is performed. In addition, even when the normal symbol lottery is won, the opening time for the electric tulip 16a to open the second starting port 16 after the end of the normal symbol variation display is set to an extremely short time of about 0.2 seconds. It is a gaming state. That is, the normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the possibility that a game ball will win the second start port 16 is extremely low. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player operates the handle lever 5 so that the game ball launched into the game area of the game board 10 flows down the left area of the center accessory 11 as shown by the arrow F1 in FIG. The game is played with the aim of winning the game ball at the first start port 15.

  When the game ball wins the first start port 15 in the normal game state ST1 and wins a big win (arrow A1), the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special game state ST2 and the special game corresponding to the type of the game. I do. In this special game, a round game in which the first big prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is opened is performed a plurality of rounds. Therefore, the player operates the handle lever 5 while the special game is being performed in the gaming machine 1, so that the game ball launched into the game area of the game board 10 is centered as shown by the arrow F <b> 2 in FIG. 1. The game is performed with the aim of causing the game ball to win the first big prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 by adjusting the right area of the accessory 11 to flow down.

  When the special game ends, the special game control unit 54 shifts the subsequent game state to either the time-short game state ST3 or the probability-change game state ST4 (arrow A2 or arrow A5).

  In the short-time gaming state ST3, when the game ball passes through the through gate 20 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol change time performed in the normal symbol display 22b is set to a relatively short time of about 3 seconds. In addition, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the gaming state in which the opening time for the electric tulip 16a to open the second starting port 16 after the normal symbol variation display ends is set to a relatively long time of about 3.5 seconds. It is. In the short-time game state ST3, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state ST1. However, in the short-time game state ST3, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special game determination is the normal probability similar to the normal game state ST1, and the game state advances the game with the normal probability. In such a short time gaming state ST3, when the game ball can be passed through the through gate 20, the electric tulip 16a is frequently opened for a long time. Therefore, when the player enters the short-time game state ST3, the player operates the handle lever 5 while the short-time game state ST3 continues at that time, as shown by the arrow F2 in FIG. The game ball launched into the area is adjusted so as to flow down the right area of the center actor 11, aiming to pass the game ball through the through gate 20 and to win the second starting port 16 that is frequently opened. To play games.

  Such a short-time gaming state ST3 is continued until, for example, a predetermined symbol variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). When a special win such as a big win is won in the special game determination performed during the duration of the short-time game state ST3, the game state shifts from the short-time game state ST3 to the special game state ST2 (arrow A3). Special games are performed according to On the other hand, if the predetermined number of special games determined in the short-time gaming state ST3 is not won in a predetermined winning such as a big win, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is then returned to the normal gaming state ST1 (arrow A4). When the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state ST1, the electric tulip 16a becomes difficult to be opened, so that the player operates the handle lever 5 to operate the gaming board 10 as shown by the arrow F1 in FIG. The game ball that is launched into the game area is adjusted so as to flow down the left area of the center accessory 11, and the game returns to the state where the game is played with the aim of winning the game ball at the first start port 15.

  When the normal game state ST1 and the short-time game state ST3 are compared, in the short-time game state ST3, the game ball frequently wins the second starting port 16 as described above, and therefore the opportunity for the special game determination to be performed is the normal game state ST1. Can be earned more often. Therefore, the short-time gaming state ST3 is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state ST1. Therefore, even if all the round games performed in the special game state ST2 before the transition to the short-time game state ST3 are all short-open rounds, the player moves to the short-time game state ST3 after the special game state ST2 ends, so that the player It is possible to obtain a gaming value that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state ST1.

  On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state ST4, as in the short-time gaming state ST3, when the game ball passes through the through gate 20 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the variation time of the normal symbol performed on the normal symbol display 22b is 3 A comparatively short time of about 3.5 seconds is set for a relatively short time of about 2 seconds, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the opening time for the electric tulip 16a to open the second start port 16 after the normal symbol variation display ends. It is a gaming state set for a long time. In the probability variation gaming state ST4, as in the short-time gaming state ST3, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal gaming state ST1. Further, in the probability variation game state ST4, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special game determination is a high probability state higher than the normal probability, and a game state in which the game is advanced with the high probability. In such a probable gaming state ST4, when the game ball can be passed through the through gate 20, the electric tulip 16a is frequently opened for a long time. Therefore, when the player changes to the probability change game state ST4, the player operates the handle lever 5 while the probability change game state ST4 continues, so that the game on the game board 10 is performed as shown by the arrow F2 in FIG. The game ball launched into the area is adjusted so as to flow down the right area of the center actor 11, aiming to pass the game ball through the through gate 20 and to win the second starting port 16 that is frequently opened. To play games.

  Such a probable game state ST4 is continued until, for example, a predetermined symbol variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times). Then, when a special win such as a big win is won in the special game determination performed while the probability variation game state ST4 is continued, the game state shifts from the probability variation game state ST4 to the special game state ST2 (arrow A6), and the hit type Special games are performed according to On the other hand, if the predetermined number of special games determined in the probability variation gaming state ST4 is not won in a predetermined winning such as a big win, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 thereafter returns to the normal gaming state ST1 (arrow A7). When the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state ST1, the electric tulip 16a becomes difficult to be opened, so that the player operates the handle lever 5 to operate the gaming board 10 as shown by the arrow F1 in FIG. The game ball that is launched into the game area is adjusted so as to flow down the left area of the center accessory 11, and the game returns to the state where the game is played with the aim of winning the game ball at the first start port 15.

  When comparing the short-time gaming state ST3 and the probability variation gaming state ST4, in the probability variation gaming state ST4, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special game determination is high, so the player wins the next jackpot early. Opportunity can be acquired. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state ST4 is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the short-time gaming state ST3. Accordingly, even if all the round games performed in the special game state ST2 before the transition to the probability change game state ST4 are all short-open rounds, the player moves to the probability change game state ST4 after the special game state ST2 ends, so that the player It is possible to obtain a gaming value more advantageous than the normal gaming state ST1 and the short-time gaming state ST3.

◇ Processing procedure of main control board 30 ◇
Next, main operation procedures performed in the main control board 30 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main operations in the main control board 30. The CPU 30a of the main control board 30 performs a process based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 5 as a timer interrupt process for a certain time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Repeat every time. When this process is started, the main control board 30 performs a random number update process (step S101), a first start port switch process (step S102), a second start port switch process (step S103), and a gate switch process (step S104). ), Various switch processes (step S105), prize ball process (step S106), special symbol process (step S107), special prize opening process (step S108), normal symbol process (step S109), electric tulip (electric chew) process (Step S110) and the output process (Step S111) are sequentially executed as a series of processes. When the series of processes is completed, the initial value random number update process (Step S112) is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when time elapses and an interrupt is generated again by the timer, execution of the processes after the random number update process (step S101) is started again. Thereafter, such processing is repeated.

  In the random number update process (step S101), a process of updating the values of various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a design random number, a variation pattern random number, and a reach random number stored in the game data storage unit 60 of the RAM 30c is performed. In the first start port switch process (step S102), the above-described game data acquisition unit 51 monitors the state of the first start port switch 41, and the game ball winning the first start port 15 passes through a predetermined area. Thus, when the first start port switch 41 is turned on, processing for obtaining game data from the game data storage unit 60 is performed. In the second start port switch process (step S103), the above-described game data acquisition unit 51 monitors the state of the second start port switch 42, and the game ball winning the second start port 16 passes through a predetermined area. Thus, when the second start port switch 42 is turned on, processing for acquiring game data from the game data storage unit 60 is performed. In the gate switch process (step S104), the state of the through gate switch 43 is monitored, and a normal symbol random number is used to draw a normal symbol when the game ball passes through the through gate 20 and the through gate switch 43 is turned on. The process of acquiring is performed. In the various switch processes (step S105), a process of inputting signals from all other switches (for example, a big prize opening switch) is performed. In the winning ball process (step S106), a process of counting the number of winnings in various winning ports and setting a winning ball command based on the counted value is performed. In the special symbol processing (step S107), special game determination processing by the special game determination unit 52, special symbol variation control unit 53, and special game control unit 54, special symbol variation processing based on the result of the special game determination, and the like are performed. . In the special prize opening process (step S108), the operation during the special game for opening the first big prize opening 17 and the second big prize opening 18 is controlled. In the normal symbol processing (step S109), the normal symbol variation display and the processing associated with the normal symbol variation display are performed. In the electric tulip process (step S110), the opening / closing operation control of the electric tulip 16a is performed. In the output process (step S111), a process of outputting a control command, game data, and the like from the main control board 30 to each of the payout control board 32 and the effect control board 33 is performed. The commands and data to be output to each substrate are generated in each process of steps S102 to S110 and are set in advance in the RAM 30c. Therefore, in this output process, the commands and data set in the RAM 30c are read and output. In the initial value random number update process (step S112), initial values of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, reach random numbers stored in the game data storage unit 60 are updated.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing details of the first start port switch process (step S102 in FIG. 5) and the second start port switch process (step S103 in FIG. 5). First, as shown in FIG. 6A, in the first start port switch process (step S102), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 15 and the first start port switch 41 is turned on. (Step S201). If the first start port switch 41 is not turned on, the first start port switch process is terminated. If the first start port switch 41 is on, it is determined whether or not the number of holds U1 stored in the first hold storage unit 61a is less than the upper limit value (step S202). In the example shown in the figure, the upper limit value is four. If the number of holdings U1 has reached the upper limit (NO in step S202), the number of holdings cannot be increased any more, and the first start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (YES in step S202), the value of the hold number U1 is incremented by 1 (step S203). Then, game data obtained by winning the first start port 15 is read from the game data storage unit 60, and various random numbers included in the game data are stored in the first hold storage unit 61a (step S204). Depending on the value of the jackpot random number read out at this time, it is determined whether the jackpot is “losing” or “lost”. In the case of “big hit”, the type of special game to be played as a special game and the game state after the end of the special game are determined by the value of the read design random number. In the case of “losing”, whether or not the reach effect is performed is determined based on the read reach random number value. Then, the main control board 30 sets game data including various read random numbers as game data for transmission for transmitting to the effect control board 33 (step S205). The transmission game data set at this time is given information indicating that it is game data acquired by winning the first start port 15. When the game data setting is completed, the first start port switch process is terminated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the second start port switch process (step S103 in FIG. 5), whether a game ball has won the second start port 16 and the second start port switch 42 is turned on. It is determined whether or not (step S301). If the second start port switch 42 is not turned on, the second start port switch process is terminated. If the second start port switch 42 is turned on, it is determined whether or not the number of holds U2 stored in the second hold storage unit 61b is less than the upper limit value (step S302). In the example shown in the figure, the upper limit value is four. If the number of holdings U2 has reached the upper limit (NO in step S302), the number of holdings cannot be increased any more, so the second start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, when the hold number U2 is less than the upper limit value (YES in step S302), 1 is added to the value of the hold number U2 (step S303). Then, game data obtained by winning the second start port 16 is read from the game data storage unit 60, and various random numbers included in the game data are stored in the second holding storage unit 61b (step S304). Based on the values of the various random numbers read at this time, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, and in the case of a loss, whether or not a reach effect is performed. Then, the main control board 30 sets game data including various read random numbers as transmission game data for transmitting to the effect control board 33 (step S305). The transmission game data set at this time is given information indicating that it is game data acquired by winning the second start port 16. When the game data setting is completed, the second start port switch process is terminated.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing details of the gate switch process (step S104 in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 20 and the through gate switch 43 is turned on (step S401). If the through gate switch 43 is not turned on, the gate switch process is terminated. If the through gate switch 43 is on, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery holding number G is less than the upper limit value (step S402). In the example shown in the figure, the upper limit value is four. If the number of reservations G has reached the upper limit (NO in step S402), the number of reservations cannot be increased any more, and the gate switch process is terminated. On the other hand, when the reserved number G is less than the upper limit value (YES in step S402), 1 is added to the value of the reserved number G (step S403). Then, the normal symbol random number for the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the through gate 20 is read, and the random number value is stored in the RAM 30c (step S404). Note that the random symbol value read at this time determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the through gate 20.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol process (step S107 in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is in a special game (step S501). If the special game is in progress, the special symbol processing cannot be performed until the special game is finished, and therefore the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation processing (YES in step S501). . On the other hand, when the special game is not being performed (NO in step S501), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is displaying the variation of the special symbol (step S502). When the special symbol variation display is not in progress (NO in step S502), it is determined whether or not the number of holdings U2 is 1 or more (step S503). When the holding number U2 is 1 or more (YES in step S503), the main control board 30 reads out the game data stored first in the second holding storage unit 61b (step S504), and the value of the holding number U2 1 is subtracted (step S505). Then, the other reserved storage areas stored in the second reserved storage unit 61b are sequentially shifted (step S506).

  On the other hand, when the hold number U2 is 0 (NO in step S503), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the hold number U1 is 1 or more (step S507). When the holding number U1 is 1 or more (YES in step S507), the main control board 30 reads the game data stored first in the first holding storage unit 61a (step S508), and the value of the holding number U1. 1 is subtracted (step S509). Then, the other reserved storage area stored in the first reserved storage unit 61a is shifted (step S510). If the number of holdings U1 is 0 (NO in step S507), it means that there is no holding based on winning in the first starting port 15 or the second starting port 16 which is the starting condition for the special game determination. The process ends without starting the special symbol variation display.

  When the game data is read out in either step S504 or step S508, the process proceeds to a process for determining a special game based on the read game data (steps S511 to S517). That is, the main control board 30 first determines whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a high probability state (probability game state ST4) (step S511), and if it is a high probability state, a special game determination table. The second table 62b included in 62 is selected and read (step S512), and if not in the high probability state, the first table 62a is selected and read (step S513). Then, the main control board 30 executes a special game determination process for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player (step S514). In the special game determination process (step S514), whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the jackpot random number included in the game data read in step S504 or S508, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the determination result. The variation time to perform is determined. The details of this special game determination process will be described later.

  After performing the special game determination process (step S514), the main control board 30 performs a symbol variation effect including a variation display of the decorative symbols 12a, 12b, and 12c corresponding to the variation time determined in the special game determination process. A change start command for causing the effect control board 33 to execute is set in the RAM 30c (step S515). Then, the main control board 30 starts the special symbol variation display on the special symbol indicator 22a (step S516), and starts the variation time measurement in order to continue the variation display until the variation time elapses (step S516). S517).

  On the other hand, when the variation of the special symbol is being displayed in step S502 (YES in step S502), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the variation time has ended (step S518). Here, it is determined whether or not the variation time measured in step S517 has reached the variation time determined in the special game determination process (step S514) when the special symbol variation display is started. If the variation time has not ended (NO in step S518), the special symbol variation display is continued, and the special symbol processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (YES in step S518), the main control board 30 sets a variation stop command for stopping the symbol variation effect performed by the effect control board 33 in the RAM 30c. (Step S519). Then, the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 22a is stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special game determination (step S520), and the measured variation time is reset (step S521). Then, the main control board 30 executes a stop process (step S522). The details of the stop process will be described later.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special game determination process (step S514 in FIG. 8). When this process is started, the main control board 30 makes a special game determination based on the table selected in step S512 or S513 in FIG. 8 as to whether or not the jackpot random number included in the game data is a jackpot (step S541). . If the jackpot is won (YES in step S542), the type of jackpot is determined based on the design random number (step S543). When determining the jackpot type, the design random number to be determined is a random number read from the first reserved storage unit 61a and a random number read from the second reserved storage unit 61b. The table to be referenced in is different. Therefore, even if the same symbol random number is used, different types of jackpots may be determined depending on whether the random numbers are read from the first reserved storage unit 61a or the second reserved storage unit 61b. When the jackpot type is determined, the main control board 30 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type as a stop symbol to be stopped after the special symbol variation display (step S544). Subsequently, the main control board 30 refers to the jackpot variation pattern table included in the variation pattern table 63 (step S545), and determines the variation time of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number (step S546). Thereafter, the main control board 30 sets in advance an opening pattern for opening the first big prize opening 17 and the second big prize opening 18 in the special game state that occurs thereafter, based on the type of jackpot determined in step S543. You may make it keep.

  If the jackpot is not won (NO in step S542), the main control board 30 sets a lost symbol based on the symbol random number as a stop symbol to be stopped after the special symbol variation display (step S547). Then, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST4 (step S548). If the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST4 (YES in step S548), the main control board 30 is included in the variation pattern table 63. The variation pattern table for probability variation game is referred to (step S549), and the variation time of the special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern random number (step S550). At this time, the main control board 30 determines whether or not a reach effect is to be performed by determining a reach random number. May be determined. In the probability variation gaming state ST4, except for the case where the reach effect is performed, the special symbol variation time is easily determined to be relatively shorter than that in the normal gaming state ST1.

  On the other hand, if it is not the probability variation gaming state ST4 (NO in step S548), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state ST3 (step S551). As a result, when it is in the short-time game state ST3 (YES in step S551), the main control board 30 refers to the short-time game variation pattern table included in the variation pattern table 63 (step S552), and based on the variation pattern random number and the like. Then, the variation time of the special symbol is determined (step S553). Also at this time, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the reach effect is to be performed by determining the reach random number. Time may be determined. In the short-time gaming state ST3, except for the case where the reach effect is performed, it becomes easier to determine the time when the variation time of the special symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal gaming state ST1.

  If it is not the short-time gaming state ST3 (NO in step S551), the main control board 30 refers to the normal game variation pattern table included in the variation pattern table 63 (step S554), and further. The number of holds stored in the first hold storage unit 61a is confirmed (step S555). Then, the variation time of the special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern random number, the number of reservations, and the like (step S556). Also at this time, the main control board 30 determines whether or not to perform the reach effect by determining the reach random number, and in the case of performing the reach effect, further refer to the reach variation pattern table for the normal game, The variation time may be determined. In the normal game state ST1, unless the reach effect is performed, if the number of reservations stored in the first reservation storage unit 61a reaches the upper limit, the variation time of the special symbol is the shortest time (for example, 2 seconds). ). This completes the special game determination process (step S514).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the stop process (step S522 in FIG. 8). In this process, after the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is shifted to the special gaming state ST2, or the time-short gaming state ST3 or the probability variation gaming state ST4 is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1. Is done. When the stop process is started, the main control board 30 determines whether or not a big hit or the like has occurred (step S571). If a win has occurred (YES in step S571), the main control board 30 corresponds to the type of the hit. The special game is set (step S572). Then, a special game start command is set in the RAM 30c in order to cause the effect control board 33 to perform an effect corresponding to the special game (step S573). Thereafter, the main control board 30 starts executing the special game (step S574). Thereby, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2.

  If the main control board 30 determines that no special game is to be generated (NO in step S571), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST4 (step S575). As a result, if the game state is ST4 (YES in Step S575), the main control board 30 decrements the count number SC, which is the remaining number of the special symbol variation display for continuing the probability game state ST4, by 1 (Step In step S576, it is determined whether the count number SC has become 0 (step S577). As a result, when the count number SC is not 0, the probability variation gaming state ST4 continues, and thus the in-stop process is terminated. When the count number SC becomes 0 (YES in step S577), the main control board 30 sets the normal gaming state ST1 as the current gaming state (step S578). As a result, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts from the probability-changing gaming state ST4 to the normal gaming state ST1.

  If the current gaming state is not the probability variation gaming state ST4 (NO in step S575), the main control board 30 determines whether or not it is the time-saving gaming state ST3 (step S579). As a result, when it is in the short-time gaming state ST3 (YES in step S579), the main control board 30 decrements the count number JC, which is the remaining number of times of the special symbol variation display for continuing the short-time gaming state ST3, by one (step S580), it is determined whether or not the count number JC has become 0 (step S581). As a result, when the count number JC is not 0, the time-saving gaming state ST3 continues, and thus the in-stop process is terminated. When the count number JC becomes 0 (YES in step S581), the main control board 30 sets the normal gaming state ST1 as the current gaming state (step S582). Thereby, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts from the short-time gaming state ST3 to the normal gaming state ST1.

  If the main control board 30 determines that the current gaming state is not the short-time gaming state ST3 but the normal gaming state ST1 (NO in step S579), then the main control board 30 ends the process without performing any special process. This is the end of the stop process (step S522).

  Next, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are flowcharts showing details of the special prize opening process (step S108 in FIG. 5). In this process, the opening / closing operation of the first grand prize port 17 and the second grand prize port 18 after the start of the special game is controlled. The main control board 30 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a special game (step S601). If it is not during the special game (NO in step S601), the opening / closing operation of the first grand prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is not performed, and thus the big prize opening process is ended. On the other hand, when the special game is in progress (YES in step S601), the main control board 30 is in the special game opening operation started by the gaming machine 1 in the above-described stopping process (step S574 in FIG. 10). It is determined whether or not there is (step S602). When the gaming machine 1 is in the opening operation (YES in step S602), the main control board 30 determines whether or not a predetermined time for opening operation (opening time) has elapsed (step S603). . If the opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S603), the opening operation is continued, and the big prize opening process is terminated.

  When the opening time has elapsed (YES in step S603), the main control board 30 adds 1 to the current round value R that opens the first grand prize winning port 17 or the second major winning prize port 18 (step S603). S604). This round value R is initialized to 0 at the start of the special game, and becomes a round value to be performed this time by adding 1 in step S604. Then, the main control board 30 confirms the opening pattern of the special game that is set in advance (step S605), and the first big winning opening 17 or the second big winning opening 18 in the current round determined by the opening pattern. Is set (step S606). Then, the main control board 30 opens one of the first grand prize winning port 17 and the second grand prize winning port 18 corresponding to the current round (step S607). Note that when the first big prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is opened, the main control board 30 starts the measurement operation of the opening time set in step S606.

  Next, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the opening time set in step S606 has elapsed since the opening of the first grand prize winning port 17 or the second grand prize winning port 18 (step S608). If the time has not elapsed (NO in step S608), it is further determined whether or not a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the first grand prize winning opening 17 or the second big winning prize opening 18. (Step S609). As a result, when the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winnings has not reached the upper limit (NO in step S609), the open state of the first big winning port 17 or the second big winning port 18 continues. Therefore, the big prize opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (YES in step S608), or when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening reaches the upper limit (YES in step S609), the main control board 30 is currently open. The first big prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is closed (step S610). Then, it is determined whether or not the current round value R is a value indicating the final round (for example, 16) (step S611). If it is not the final round (NO in step S611), the special game continues, and thus the big prize opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the current round value R is a value indicating the final round (YES in step S611), the main control board 30 executes the processing from step S612 onward to end the special game. That is, the main control board 30 resets the current round value R to 0 (step S612), and determines whether or not to shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability-changing gaming state ST4 (step S613). When shifting to the probability change game state ST4 after the end of the special game (YES in step S613), the main control board 30 sets the probability change game state ST4 as the game state after the end of the special game (step S614). A predetermined value (for example, 10000) is set to the count SC of the number of times of continuous display of special symbols that are continued (step S615). If the count number SC set here is set to 10,000, for example, the probability variation gaming state ST4 is substantially continued until the next jackpot winning. Further, if the count is set to a value of about 100 or less, it is realistic that the probability-changing gaming state ST4 returns to the normal gaming state ST1 without winning a big hit in the probability-changing gaming state ST4.

  If the main control board 30 determines that the transition to the probability-changing game state ST4 is not made after the special game ends (NO in step S613), the main control board 30 sets the short-time game state ST3 as the game state after the special game ends (step S616). A predetermined value (for example, 100) is set to the count number JC of the number of times of special symbol variation display in which the gaming state ST3 continues (step S617).

  Then, the main control board 30 starts measuring time for ending the special game (step S618), and determines whether or not the ending has ended (step S619). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the ending was started, it is determined that the ending has not been completed (NO in step S619), and the big prize opening process is terminated. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the ending was started, it is determined that the ending has ended (YES in step S619), and a special game end command is set on the effect control board 33 to end the special game effect (step S619). S620), the special game is ended (step S621).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the gaming machine 1 is not opening (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to the flowchart of FIG. 12, and the main control board 30 determines whether the first grand prize port 17 or the second grand prize port. It is determined whether or not 18 is open (step S651). If it is open (YES in step S651), the processing from step S608 shown in FIG. 11 is executed. If it is not open (NO in step S651), it is determined whether or not the gaming machine 1 is ending a special game (step S652). If the ending is in progress (YES in step S652), the processes in and after step S619 shown in FIG. 11 are executed. If the ending is not in progress (NO in step S652), the elapsed time after the first grand prize winning port 17 or the second major winning prize port 18 is closed has passed a predetermined execution interval (interval time) of each round. Whether or not (step S653). If the interval time has not elapsed (NO in step S653), it is not the timing for carrying out the next round yet, so the big prize opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when the interval time has elapsed (YES in step S653), the processing after step S604 shown in FIG. 11 is executed to perform the next round.

  When a special game is started in the gaming machine 1 by the above-described special prize opening process, the first big prize opening 17 or the second big prize opening 18 is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special game. Is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). When the special game ends, either the short time gaming state ST3 or the probability variation gaming state ST4 is set.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the normal symbol processing (step S109 in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is an auxiliary game (step S701). The auxiliary game is in a state where the process for driving the electric tulip 16a to the open state by winning the normal symbol lottery is started and the process has not been completed yet. If the auxiliary game is being performed (YES in step S701), the main control board 30 ends the normal symbol process without starting the normal symbol variation display. If it is not in an auxiliary game (NO in step S701), it is determined whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is displaying a normal symbol variation (step S702). If the normal symbol is not being variably displayed (NO in step S702), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery holding number G is 1 or more (step S703). When the number of holdings G is 0 (NO in step S703), it means that there is no game ball passing to the through gate 20 which is the starting condition of the normal symbol lottery, so the normal symbol variation display is not started. Normal symbol processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the holding number G is 1 or more (YES in step S703), the main control board 30 reads game data (normal symbol random number) corresponding to the earliest holding (step S704), and the holding number G 1 is subtracted by 1 (step S705), and the storage area storing other hold is shifted (step S706). Then, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the normal symbol random number read from the hold is a predetermined winning value, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (step S707). When the normal symbol lottery is won (YES in step S707), the main control board 30 sets a symbol (winning symbol) indicating that the normal symbol lottery is won in the RAM 30c (step S708). If the normal symbol lottery is not won (NO in step S707), a symbol (losing symbol) indicating that the normal symbol lottery is lost is set in the RAM 30c (step S709).

  Then, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is currently in the short-time gaming state ST3 or the probability-changing gaming state ST4 (step S710), and if it is in the short-time gaming state ST3 or the certainty-changing gaming state ST4 (step S710). And YES), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (3 seconds in the case of the example) (step S711). If it is determined that the current gaming state is neither the short-time gaming state ST3 nor the probability-changing gaming state ST4 (NO in step S710), the normal symbol variation time is set to a long time (29 seconds in the example). (Step S712). The main control board 30 starts normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 22b of the symbol display 22 based on the variation time set in step S711 or S712 (step S713), and the variation time is measured. Is started (step S714).

  If the normal symbol variation display is in progress (YES in step S702), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the regular symbol variation time has ended (step S715). That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time at which measurement is started in step S714 has reached the variation time set in step S711 or S712. If the variation time has not ended (NO in step S715), the normal symbol variation display is continued, and the normal symbol processing is terminated as it is. When the variation time has ended (YES in step S715), the main control board 30 stops the variation display of the normal symbol and displays the symbol set in step S708 or S709 (step S716). Thereafter, the measured variation time is reset (step S717). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (step S718), and if it has been won (YES in step S718), an auxiliary game for opening the electric tulip 16a is started (step S719). As a result, the current state of the gaming machine 1 becomes an auxiliary game. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won (NO in step S718), the normal symbol processing is terminated while the current state of the gaming machine 1 is maintained.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the electric tulip process (step S110 (electricity Chu process) in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is an auxiliary game (step S801). If the auxiliary game is not being performed (NO in step S801), the electric tulip 16a is not released, and thus the electric tulip process is terminated. If the auxiliary game is being performed (YES in step S801), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the electric tulip 16a is being opened (step S802). If the electric tulip 16a is not being opened (step S802) It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state ST3 or the probability-changing gaming state st4 (NO in step S802) (step S803). When the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state ST3 or the probability variation gaming state ST4 (YES in step S803), the main control board 30 sets the electric tulip 16a for a long time (3.5 seconds in the illustrated example). (Step S804). In addition, when neither the short-time gaming state ST3 nor the probability-changing gaming state ST4 is in the normal gaming state ST1 (NO in step S803), the main control board 30 shortens the opening time of the electric tulip 16a (in the example shown in the figure). 0.2 second) (step S805). Then, the main control board 30 drives the electric Chu solenoid 44 to open the electric tulip 16a (Step S806), and starts measuring the elapsed time after opening (Step S807). On the other hand, if the electric tulip 16a has already been opened (YES in step S802), the processes in steps S803 to S807 are skipped. Thereafter, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the opening time set in step S804 or S805 has elapsed (step S808), and if the opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S808), the electric tulip 16a. Since the open state is continued, the electric tulip process is terminated. If the opening time has elapsed (YES in step S808), the main control board 30 drives the electric chew solenoid 44 to return the electric tulip 16a to the closed state (step S809), ends the auxiliary game, and performs electric tulip processing. Is finished (step S810).

  Through the processing shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the electric tulip 16a is opened more frequently and longer than the normal gaming state ST1 in the short-time gaming state ST3 or the probability-changing gaming state ST4, and the second start port It becomes easier for a game ball to enter 16.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the output process (step S111 in FIG. 5). In this process, various data and commands are output from the main control board 30 to the sub-control board 31. First, when the game data for transmission is set, the main control board 30 transmits it to the effect control board 33 (step S901). If the game data for transmission is not set, the transmission process in step S901 is not performed. Next, if the variation start command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and an instruction is given to perform the symbol variation effect corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol (step S902). Thereby, the fluctuating effect which fluctuates the decorative symbols 12a, 12b and 12c by the effect control board 33 is started. If the change start command is not set, the transmission process in step S902 is not performed. Next, if the change stop command is set, is it transmitted to the effect control board 33, and the change effect being executed by the effect control board 33 is stopped and the result of the special game determination is a big hit? An instruction is given to notify the player whether or not (step S903). If the change stop command is not set, the transmission process in step S903 is not performed. Next, if the special game start command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and the start of the effect operation accompanying the start of the special game is instructed (step S904). The special game start command transmitted at this time includes information indicating whether the gaming state after the special game is the short-time gaming state ST3 or the probability-changing gaming state ST4. If the special game start command is not set, the transmission process in step S904 is not performed. Next, if the special game end command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and the end of the effect corresponding to the special game is instructed (step S905). If the special game end command is not set, the transmission process in step S905 is not performed. Next, if the normal symbol variation start command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and an instruction to perform an effect corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is given (S906). If the normal symbol variation start command is not set, the transmission process in step S906 is not performed. Finally, if various other commands are set, each part is controlled by transmitting it to the effect control board 33 and the payout control board 32 (step S907). For example, a prize ball command that accompanies winning of a game ball at various winning openings is transmitted to the payout control board 32 at this time, and the payout control board 32 pays out a prize ball. Thus, the output process ends.

◆ Direction control board 33 ◆
Next, details of the effect control board 33 will be described. FIG. 16 is a block diagram schematically showing the main functional configuration of the effect control board 33. The effect control board 33 receives various commands CMD1 from the main control board 30 as described above, and controls the effects according to the commands CMD1. In addition, when the operation button 6 is operated by the player, the effect control board 33 receives the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6, thereby providing an effect according to the operation state of the operation button 6 by the player. It can be carried out. Hereinafter, the configuration and operation of such an effect control board 33 will be described in detail.

  The effect control board 33 includes the CPU 33a, the ROM 33b, the RAM 33c, and the RTC 33d as described above.

  The CPU 33 a of the effect control board 33 includes an effect control unit 65 and an operation control unit 66. The effect control unit 65 functions as an effect pattern determination unit 70, a normal game effect control unit 71, and a special game effect control unit 72.

  When receiving the change start command from the main control board 30, the effect pattern determining unit 70 selects one effect pattern corresponding to the change time of the special symbol included in the change start command from the plurality of effect patterns 77. By selecting based on the table 79, an effect pattern such as a symbol variation effect performed in the gaming machine 1 is determined.

  The normal game effect control unit 71 and the special game effect control unit 72 control the execution of the effect by the effect device 36 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70.

  The normal game effect control unit 71 causes the effect device 36 to execute an effect according to the change time of the special symbol in the normal game state in which the special symbol is changed. Specifically, the normal game effect control unit 71 performs a symbol variation effect that fluctuates the three decorative symbols 12 a, 12 b, and 12 c displayed on the display screen of the image display 12, and from the main control board 30. In addition to the effects determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70 based on the command, effects are given to the sub-display 13, the speaker 8, the frame lamp 9, or the movable accessory 14 according to the operation status of the operation buttons 6 during a predetermined period. Let it run. In addition, when the scenario effect pattern 78 is determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the normal game effect control unit 71 indicates the suggested effect control unit 74 in the scenario progress effect control unit 73 according to the contents of the determined scenario effect pattern 78. The first stage production control unit 75 and the second stage production control unit 76 are caused to function in a predetermined order and timing, respectively, so that the production device 36 executes the scenario production pattern 78.

  Further, when the result of the special game determination is a big win, the special game effect control unit 72 performs the special game effect control according to the winning type won in the special game determination after the end of the normal game effect by the normal game effect control unit 71. Control execution.

  The operation control unit 66 processes the operation status detected from the operation button 6 as operation information, and is connected to the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 and the operation signal storage unit 69 of the RAM 33c. The operation status is detected by an operation signal SGN output from the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6. For example, the operation button switch 6b outputs a low level signal when the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is in a non-operating state, and outputs a high level signal when the movable body 6a is in an operating state. Therefore, the operation control unit 66 uses the output of the operation button 6 (operation button switch 6b) as the operation information based on the operation status (for example, whether the operation button 6 has been operated or whether the operation state for the operation button 6 has continued). It becomes possible to process. Specifically, the operation control unit 66 performs a predetermined operation of the operation signal SGN input to the input port (not shown) of the effect control board 33 as a digital signal from the operation button 6 (operation button switch 6b) by timer interruption processing. Sample every hour (eg every 2 milliseconds).

  The operation control unit 66 is further referred to as an operation signal SGN1 (hereinafter referred to as “current operation signal SGN1” or “operation signal SGN1”) of the operation signal SGN input to the input port (not shown) of the effect control board 33. ) And the previously sampled operation signal SGN2 (hereinafter also referred to as “previous operation signal SGN2” or “operation signal SGN2”), the presence / absence of an on-edge, the presence / absence of an off-edge, the number of on-edges, etc. are detected as shown in FIG. In addition, by detecting the number of ON signals and the like, the operation status can be processed as operation information in association with the operation time. In other words, the operation control unit 66 can grasp the operation information from the operation state of the operation button 6 by processing the operation signals SGN1 and SGN2. As a result, the effect control unit 65 can determine whether or not the operation button 6 is performing a predetermined operation such as a single press operation, a continuous press operation, or a long press operation, as will be described later.

  Details of the operation information processing by the operation control unit 66 will be described later. In FIG. 16, the operation control unit 66 is provided on the effect control board 33. However, the operation control unit 66 is provided on the image control board 34 or the lamp control board 35, or the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 are provided. It may be provided as one substrate, and the operation control unit 66 may be provided on this one substrate.

  The ROM 33b of the effect control board 33 stores in advance a plurality of effect patterns 77 that are performed as normal game effects. Each of the plurality of effect patterns 77 is an effect pattern that performs an effect corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol determined by the special symbol variation control unit 53. In addition, the plurality of effect patterns include a plurality of scenario effect patterns 78 having different contents of the effects according to the operation contents of the player with respect to the operation buttons 6. The scenario effect pattern 78 is defined such that a scenario in which a plurality of stages are set from the initial stage to the final stage progresses in stages depending on whether or not the operation button 6 is operated by the player or the content of the operation. It is a production pattern. All of the plurality of scenario effect patterns 78 are stored in the ROM 33b as effect patterns corresponding to the same variation time of the special symbol. The ROM 33b stores in advance an effect pattern selection table 79 for selecting one effect pattern from the plurality of effect patterns 77 corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol.

  The RAM 33 c of the effect control board 33 includes a reception buffer 67, a transmission buffer 68, and an operation signal storage unit 69.

  The reception buffer 67 stores the command CMD1 transmitted from the main control board 30 and the like. On the other hand, the transmission buffer 68 stores a command CMD2 for causing the rendering device 36 such as the image display 12 or the frame lamp 9 to perform rendering using the image control board 34 or the lamp control board 35. The command CMD2 is generated based on the result of the effect control unit 66 analyzing the command in the reception buffer 67 or based on the processing result of the operation information by the operation control unit 66 by the effect control unit 66. The CMD2 stored in the transmission buffer 68 is transmitted to the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 by the effect control unit 65. As a result, the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 cause the effect device 36 to execute effects according to the command CMD2.

  The operation signal storage unit 69 includes a sampling signal storage unit 69a, an edge storage unit 69b, an on-edge count number storage unit 69c, and an on-signal count number storage unit 69d.

  The sampling signal storage unit 69a is referred to, for example, for processing the operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 for detecting the on-edge, detecting the off-edge, updating the on-edge number counter, updating the on-signal number counter, etc. by the operation control unit 66. Is. The sampling signal storage unit 69a stores the current operation signal SGN1 and the previous operation signal SGN2, and has a first storage area for storing the current operation signal SGN1 and a second storage area for storing the previous operation signal SGN2. doing. In the first storage area and the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a, the operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 from the operation button 6 (operation button switch 6b) are both high level signals (hereinafter referred to as “ON signal”) corresponding to the ON state. “1” is written, while “0” is written when the signal is a low level signal corresponding to the off state (hereinafter also referred to as “off signal”). Specifically, when the operation signal SGN1 is an ON signal, the operation control unit 66 writes “1” in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a while the operation signal SGN1 is an OFF signal. "0" is written in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit. On the other hand, the previous operation signal SGN2 is obtained by shifting the previously sampled operation signal SGN2 stored in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a to the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a. The data is stored in the storage unit 69a. That is, in the present embodiment, at least two operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 of the current operation signal SGN1 and the previous operation signal SGN2 are stored, and the storage contents for these operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 are obtained by timer interruption processing of the effect control unit 65. Updated sequentially.

  The edge storage unit 69b stores the presence / absence of detection of an on-edge and an off-edge (hereinafter collectively referred to as “edge”). The operation control unit 66 controls the on-edge number counter and the on-signal number counter. Referenced when updating. The edge storage unit 69b has a first storage area for storing that an on-edge is detected, and a second storage area for storing that an off-edge is detected. In the first storage area and the second storage area of the edge storage unit 69b, “1” is written when an edge is detected, and “0” is written when an edge is not detected.

  Here, the on-edge is obtained when the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, that is, when the operation button switch 6b changes from the off state to the on state. Therefore, it is possible to know the timing when the operation on the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is started and the number of operations on the operation button 6 by detecting the on-edge. In the example of FIG. 17, between sampling timing 3 and sampling timing 4, between sampling timing 7 and sampling timing 8, between sampling timing 11 and sampling timing 12, between sampling timing 13 and sampling timing 14, There is a portion where the state of the operation button switch 6b changes between the sampling timing 15 and the sampling timing 16, between the sampling timing 18 and the sampling timing 19, and between the sampling timing 21 and the sampling timing 22, from the off state to the on state. Corresponds to on-edge. Such an on-edge is a part where the state of the operation button switch 6b changes from the off state to the on state. The current operation signal SGN1 is stored as “1” in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a as “0” in the area. Therefore, the operation control unit 66 refers to the contents of the first storage area and the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a in the RAM 33c in the timer interrupt process, and “0” is stored in the second storage area. Whether or not there is an on-edge is determined based on whether or not “1” is stored in one storage area. In the example of FIG. 17, the operation control unit 66 has an on-edge at the sampling timing 4, the sampling timing 8, the sampling timing 12, the sampling timing 14, the sampling timing 16, the sampling timing 19, and the sampling timing 22 indicated by arrows in the drawing. Judge. When the on-edge is detected, the operation control unit 66 writes “1” in the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b, and the fact that the on-edge is detected is stored in the RAM 33c. On the other hand, the operation control unit 66 writes “0” in the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b when the on-edge is not detected, and the fact that no on-edge is detected is stored in the RAM 33c.

  On the other hand, the off edge is obtained when the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, that is, when the operation button switch 6b changes from the on state to the off state, contrary to the on edge. Therefore, by detecting the off edge, the timing at which the operation on the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is released, the number of on signals from when the on edge is detected until the off edge is detected (continuous operation on the operation button 6). Time). In the example of FIG. 17, between sampling timing 6 and sampling timing 7, between sampling timing 8 and sampling timing 9, between sampling timing 12 and sampling timing 13, between sampling timing 14 and sampling timing 15, A portion where the state of the operation button switch 6b between the sampling timing 17 and the sampling timing 18 and between the sampling timing 19 and the sampling timing 20 changes from the on state to the off state corresponds to an off edge. Such an off edge is a part where the state of the operation button switch 6b changes from the on state to the off state, so that the previous operation signal SGN2 is set to “1” in the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a and the operation is performed this time. The signal SGN1 is stored in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a as “0”. Therefore, the operation control unit 66 refers to the contents of the first storage area and the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a in the RAM 33c in the timer interrupt process, and “1” is stored in the second sampling signal storage area. Whether or not there is an off-edge is determined based on whether or not “0” is stored in the first sampling signal storage area. In the example of FIG. 17, the CPU 33a determines that there is an off-edge at the sampling timing 7, the sampling timing 9, the sampling timing 13, the sampling timing 15, the sampling timing 18, and the sampling timing 20 indicated by arrows in the drawing.

  The on-edge count number storage unit 69c implements an on-edge number counter, and is updated when the operation signal SGN1 is sampled by the timer interrupt processing by the operation control unit 66. The on-edge number counter includes, for example, the flag-type on-edge number counter and the cumulative on-edge number counter shown in FIG. In the flag-type on-edge number counter, “1” is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c when an on-edge is detected, and the on-edge count number storage unit 69c stores the first number when the off-edge is detected. “0” is written in one storage area. Such a flag-type on-edge counter is continuously used in the operation reception valid period when the production control unit 65 determines whether a predetermined operation such as a long press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period. Reference is made to determine whether or not the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 has been operated, whether or not the operation button 6 has been operated before the operation acceptance valid period. On the other hand, in the cumulative on-edge number counter, when an on-edge is detected during an operation reception valid period for a predetermined operation such as a long press operation or a continuous hitting operation, “1” is stored in the second storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. Incremented by one. Such a cumulative on-edge number counter is referred to by the effect control unit 65 to determine whether or not a predetermined operation such as a continuous pressing operation has been performed during the operation reception valid period.

  The on signal count number storage unit 69d implements an on signal number counter. The ON signal number counter includes, for example, an ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter and a cumulative ON signal number counter shown in FIG. The on-off edge ON signal number counter increments the number of ON signal samplings from when the ON edge is detected to when the OFF edge is detected, by 1 in the first storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d. The Such an ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter is referred to by the effect control unit 65 in order to obtain information related to the time during which the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is continuously operated. The on-off edge on signal counter is updated based on the detection result of the on edge and off edge by the operation control unit 66 and the contents of the current operation signal SGN1 when the operation control unit 66 samples the operation signal SGN1. The On the other hand, in the cumulative ON signal number counter, the ON signal sampling number (the number of signals in the switch ON state) is stored in the second number of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d in the operation reception valid period for a predetermined operation regardless of the ON edge and OFF edge. The storage area is incremented by “1”. Such a cumulative ON signal number counter is referred to by the effect control unit 65 in order to obtain information related to the time during which the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is operated. The cumulative ON signal number counter is updated based on the content of the operation signal SGN1 when the operation control unit 66 samples the operation signal SGN1.

  Predetermined processes such as on-edge detection, off-edge detection, on-edge number counter update, and on-signal number counter update based on the sampled operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 are performed when an effect based on a scenario effect pattern described later is executed. You may make it perform by the control part 65. FIG.

  When updating the ON signal number counter when performing an effect based on the scenario effect pattern, the ON signal number counter is not updated (incremented) until a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Thereafter, updating (incrementing) of the ON signal number counter may be started. When sampling the operation signal from the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6, detecting the on-edge or off-edge, and updating the on-edge number counter or the on-signal number counter, these processes are at least predetermined operations such as a long press operation. It may be performed in the operation reception valid period for determining whether or not the operation has been performed, and whether or not the processing such as sampling of the operation signal is performed in a period other than the operation reception valid period is arbitrary.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect pattern selection table 79. The effect pattern selection table 79 is table information in which an effect pattern is associated with a special symbol variation time as shown in FIG. In the effect pattern selection table 79, selection time setting information can be additionally recorded.

  For example, if the effect pattern A is associated with a change time of 2 seconds and the change time of the special symbol included in the change start command is 2 seconds, the effect pattern determination unit 70 sets the change time of 2 seconds. An effect pattern A is selected as the corresponding effect. In addition, production patterns B, C, and D are associated with fluctuation times of 5 seconds, 6 seconds, and 7 seconds, respectively, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol included in the fluctuation start command is 5 seconds, 6 seconds, or 7 seconds. If so, the effect pattern determination unit 70 selects the effect pattern B, C, or D as the effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of 5 seconds, 6 seconds, or 7 seconds. Further, if the scenario effect pattern 78 is associated with the 90 second variation time and the variation time of the special symbol included in the variation start command is 90 seconds, the effect pattern determining unit 70 will change the 90 second variation time. The scenario effect pattern 78 is selected as an effect corresponding to the above. The scenario effect pattern 78 includes a plurality of scenario effect patterns (first scenario effect patterns A to F and second scenario effect patterns A and B) as described later. As described above, in the effect pattern selection table 79, except for the scenario effect pattern 78, the special symbol change time and the effect pattern are associated one-to-one. In the effect pattern selection table 79, when one effect pattern is associated with one fluctuation time on a one-to-one basis (for example, in the case of effect patterns A to D), selection time setting information is not registered in the effect pattern.

  On the other hand, the scenario effect pattern 78 is associated with the same predetermined time in the special symbol variation time in the effect pattern selection table 79. In the example of FIG. 18, the first scenario presentation pattern 781 composed of the first scenario presentation pattern A to the first scenario presentation pattern F, and the second scenario presentation pattern 782 composed of the second scenario presentation pattern A and the second scenario presentation pattern B. A total of eight scenario effect patterns 78 including are associated with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. In these scenario effect patterns 78, selection time setting information is registered in advance. The selection time setting information is information that is referred to in order to select one scenario effect pattern from the eight scenario effect patterns 78 when the variation time of the special symbol is a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds). This is information in which different time zones are set for each of the plurality of scenario effect patterns (first scenario effect patterns A to F and second scenario effect patterns A and B). Therefore, when the variation time included in the variation start command received from the main control board 30 is 90 seconds, the effect pattern determination unit 70 refers to the time information output from the RTC 33d, and generates a plurality of scenario effect patterns (first One scenario effect pattern corresponding to the current date and time is selected from the scenario effect patterns A to F and the second scenario effect patterns A and B), and the selected scenario effect pattern is performed in the effect device 36 of the gaming machine 1. Determine as a pattern.

  However, the effect pattern determining unit 70 is not limited to selecting one scenario effect pattern according to the current date and time output from the RTC 33d as described above. For example, the variation time of the special symbol is a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds). In the case of, a lottery is performed, and one scenario effect pattern is selected from a plurality of scenario effect patterns 78 (first scenario effect patterns A to F and second scenario effect patterns A and B) based on the lottery result. It doesn't matter.

  The normal game effect control unit 71 operates each of the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 based on the effect pattern when one effect pattern to be executed is determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70. The execution of the effect accompanying the determination of the special game in the gaming machine 1 is controlled. The normal game effect control unit 71 includes a scenario progress effect control unit 73. The scenario progress effect control unit 73 functions when any one of the plurality of scenario effect patterns 78 is selected, and performs control such that a symbol variation effect based on the scenario effect pattern 78 is performed. That is, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 causes the effect device 36 such as the image display 12 to perform the scenario progress effect via the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35.

  The scenario progress effect starts from the initial stage, and the scenario progresses step by step according to the presence or absence of a single press operation, continuous press operation or long press operation on the operation button 6 by the player, and finally the scenario reaches the final stage. If progressed, it is the effect that the degree of expectation that the game value advantageous to the player is given is the highest. For example, in this embodiment, when the variation time of the special symbol is 90 seconds, a scenario progress effect for 90 seconds is performed. Therefore, when the result of the special game determination is a big hit and the subsequent game state is to be shifted to the special game state ST2, if the variation time of the special symbol determined in the main control board 30 is 90 seconds In many cases, a scenario progress effect that finally progresses to the final stage is performed. Even if the result of the special game determination is a big hit and the subsequent game state is shifted to the special game state ST2, a scenario progress effect that does not proceed to the final stage may be performed. In this case, after notifying that it has not progressed to the final stage, the revival effect 110 is performed, and the result of the special game determination is a big hit by the revival effect 110, and the subsequent game state shifts to the special game state ST2. To be notified. On the other hand, if the result of the special game determination is a loss and the subsequent game state is not shifted to the special game state ST2, if the variation time of the special symbol determined in the main control board 30 is 90 seconds Finally, a scenario progression effect that does not proceed to the final stage is performed. In this way, in the scenario progress production, the scenario is advanced step by step from the initial stage and approaches the final stage, so the player's expectation is raised step by step by the progress of the scenario. Will be able to go. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special game determination is to be shifted to the special game state ST2, the final stage is performed with a higher probability than when the result of the special game determination is not to be shifted to the special game state ST2. The scenario progress effect that progresses to will be performed.

  In order to control the scenario progress effect as described above, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 includes a suggestion effect control unit 74, a first stage effect control unit 75, and a second stage effect control unit 76.

  The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests the expectation effects 103 and 203 that indicate the expectation degree that the scenario progress effect starting from the initial stage proceeds to the final stage between the first stage effects 100 and 200 and the second stage effects 104 and 204. It is what makes you do. The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests an expectation effect 103 based on whether or not a predetermined operation is performed within a predetermined period after the operation guidance image for prompting a predetermined operation on the operation button 6 is displayed. 203

  When the suggestion effects control unit 74 performs the suggestion effects 103 and 203, the suggestion effects control unit 74 causes the suggestion effects 103 and 203 based on the result of the special game determination performed by the special game determination unit 52 (see FIGS. 19 and 54). . Therefore, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggested effect 103 having a higher expectation that the scenario progress effect will reach the final stage than the determination result not to shift to the special game state ST2. , 203 are performed.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 causes the first stage effects 100 and 200 to advance the scenario progress effect to the first stage according to a predetermined operation on the operation button 6 by the player. The first stage effects 100 and 200 are effects that do not advance the scenario progress effect to the final stage but advance the scenario progress effect to the first stage before the final stage. The first stage effect control unit 75 performs an operation on the operation button 6 by the player within a predetermined period after an operation guide image for prompting a predetermined operation such as a single press operation or a long press operation on the operation button 6 is displayed. (See FIG. 19 and FIG. 54), if it is determined that there is no predetermined operation by the player, the scenario progress effect may not be advanced. In that case, the scenario progress effect does not proceed toward the final stage. Therefore, the player actively operates the operation button 6 to advance the scenario progress effect.

  The second stage effect control unit 76 operates after the first stage effects 100 and 200 and the suggestion effects 103 and 203 are performed by the first stage effect control unit 75, and the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage. After performing the second stage scenario progress effects 105 and 205, the final result notification effects 106 and 206 (success effects 107 and 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, and the failure effects that do not progress to the final stage. 108, 208 or failure effects 109, 209 are followed by a resurrection effect 110, 210) (see FIGS. 19 and 54). The second stage effect control unit 76 plays the game within a predetermined period after the operation guidance image for prompting a predetermined operation on the operation button 6 is displayed as the second stage scenario progress effect 105 in the second stage effect 104. The operation for the operation button 6 by the player is accepted (see FIGS. 19, 29 and 54), and the final result notification effects 106 and 206 are displayed at the timing when it is determined that the player has long-pressed the operation button 6 within the period. You may do it. However, even if it is determined that the player has not performed the predetermined operation on the operation button 6 during the predetermined period, the second stage effect control unit 76 shifts the result of the special game determination to the special game state ST2. Depending on whether or not, the success effects 107 and 207 at the timing when the predetermined period has passed, the failure effects 108 and 208 not progressing to the final stage, or the resurrection effects 110 and 210 after the failure effects 109 and 209 are performed. In addition, when the result of the special game determination is shifted to the special game state ST2, the second stage effect control unit 76 has a higher probability than the case where the result of the special game determination is not shifted to the special game state ST2. In the second stage effects 104 and 204, the second stage scenario progress effects 105 and 205 are followed by the success effects 107 and 207, and in the success effects 107 and 207 or after the success effects 107 and 207, the special game determination is performed. The result is a big hit, and it is notified that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2.

  The special game effect control unit 72 operates when the symbol variation effect performed by the normal game effect control unit 71 ends and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special game state ST2, and produces the effect in the special game state ST2. It is something to control. As described above, in the special game state ST2, a round game in which the first grand prize winning port 17 and the second grand prize winning port 18 are alternatively opened is performed a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). Therefore, for example, the special game effect control unit 72 performs an effect corresponding to the special game state ST2 such as displaying the current number of rounds on the image display 12 while the plurality of round games are performed.

◆ Scenario progress production based on scenario production pattern 78 ◆
Hereinafter, the scenario progress effect when the scenario effect pattern 78 is selected by the effect pattern determination unit 70 will be described in detail. This scenario effect pattern 78 is executed as a reach effect, and includes a first scenario effect pattern 781 and a second scenario effect pattern 782 having different basic effects. The first scenario effect pattern 781 includes six first scenario effect patterns A to F. These first scenario effect patterns A to F have the same basic effect but the second stage effect 104 is different. The second scenario effect pattern 782 includes two second scenario effect patterns A and B. These second scenario effect patterns A and B have the same basic effect but differ in the suggested effect 203.

<Scenario progress effect based on first scenario effect pattern 781>
First, the basic effect of the first scenario effect pattern 781 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the timing of the first scenario effect pattern 781 defined in advance in the scenario effect pattern 78. When the first scenario effect pattern 781 is selected by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 changes the first stage effect control unit 75, the suggestion effect control unit 74, and the second stage effect control unit 76 in this order. The first stage effect 100, the suggestion effect 103, and the second stage effect 104 defined as the first scenario effect pattern 781 are respectively executed at predetermined timings.

  When the scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781 is started at the timing T0, the first stage effect control unit 75 first executes the first stage effect 100 within the first stage effect period (T0 to T2). To work.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 starts the title display 101 corresponding to the first scenario effect pattern 781 at the timing T0 and continues the title display 101 for the title display period (T0 to T1). The first stage effect control unit 75 has reached the timing T1 which is the start timing of the first stage scenario progress effect period (T1 to T2) after the title display period (T0 to T1) has elapsed, that is, the title display period (T0 to T0). If it is determined that T1) has ended, then the first stage scenario progress effect 102 is started.

When the first stage scenario progress effect 102 is started at timing T1, the first stage effect control unit 75 displays a single stroke operation guide image to prompt the player to perform a single stroke operation of the operation button 6, and then performs the single stroke operation. in pushing operation acceptance lifetime _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ with accepting a one-base hit pressing operation of the operation button 6 by the player, whether one-base hit pressing operation is performed in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ the Determine. Further, when the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the player has made a single-stroke operation within the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), after this determination (single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1) _{Even if 1 to} T1 ₂ ) have not elapsed, the first stage scenario progress effect 102 is executed to advance the first scenario progress effect to the predetermined first stage. This first stage is a stage that has advanced to the final stage from the initial stage and has not yet reached the final stage.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has not performed the single stroke pressing operation, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs the first scenario progress effect at a predetermined stage after the _single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed. To make progress. When the player does not accept a single press operation, the stage in which the scenario progress effect progresses is the minimum progress width, and is a stage that is less than the first stage. That is, if the player performs a single stroke pressing operation within the _single stroke pressing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the scenario progress performance proceeds much more than when the single stroke pressing operation is not performed. A player who expects to proceed to the final stage actively performs a single stroke operation on the operation button 6. In the first stage effect 100, the effect of advancing the scenario progress effect to the first stage by receiving the single press operation as described above is performed at least once. Then, after starting the first stage effect 100, at the timing T2, the first stage effect 100 by the first stage effect control unit 75 ends.

  In the first stage scenario progress effect 102, instead of advancing the scenario effect depending on whether or not the player has made a single stroke operation on the operation button 6, the scenario effect is advanced depending on the presence or absence of a continuous hit operation or a long press operation. You may do it. In addition, in the case where the progress of the first stage scenario progress effect 102 is determined based on the presence / absence of an operation other than the long press operation such as a single press operation or a continuous press operation, an operation acceptance is effective for determining the presence / absence of an operation other than the long press operation. When a long press operation is performed within the period, the stage in which the scenario progress effect progresses may be set to the minimum progress width. That is, if a long press operation is performed during an operation reception period other than the long press operation, it is processed as if the long press operation has not been performed, and the production mode is not changed in accordance with the long press operation. (It may be possible not to execute the long press effect). Furthermore, the first stage scenario progress effect 102 determines the stage at which the scenario progress effect progresses based only on the result of the special game determination, regardless of the single press operation on the operation button 6 by the player, and executes this determination. You may make it do.

  At timing T2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 functions to execute the suggestion effect 103 within the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 103 from the timing T2, and ends the suggestion effect 103 at the timing T3.

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 103, the scenario progress effect is finalized based on the result of the special game determination and the presence / absence of the single press operation within the plurality of single press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). Produce the degree of expectation that will progress to the stage. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage, for example, a plurality of characters 80a and 80b are displayed on the image display 12 and the plurality of characters 80a and 80b exchange conversations. The degree of expectation is suggested by the conversation content (see FIG. 23). At timing T3, the suggestion effect 103 by the suggestion effect control unit 74 ends.

  In the present embodiment, a maximum of three lines effects are executed, but these lines effects are sequentially executed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, three single-pressing operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) are provided corresponding to three line effects, and the operation button 6 is set to be a player during each single-pressing operation acceptance valid period. Whether or not to execute each line effect is determined depending on whether or not a single stroke pressing operation is performed. As described above, if the expectation degree of whether or not the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage according to the operation by the player on the operation button 6 is suggested, the player can perform a single press operation on the operation button 6. If not, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage is not suggested. Therefore, the player positively operates the operation button 6.

It should be noted that the single press operation on the operation button 6 by the player was not performed within the first or second single press operation reception effective period of the three single press operation reception effective periods (1) to (3). In this case, even if a single stroke operation is performed during the subsequent single stroke operation acceptance valid period, the line production for the single stroke push operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) and the single stroke operation acceptance after the single stroke operation acceptance valid period are accepted. You may make it restrict | limit execution of the speech production with respect to the validity period (1)-(3). Here, “restricting the execution of the serif effect” means not only that the serif effect is not performed, but also that the single press operation is performed within the three single press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). It includes performing other effects (not limited to serif effects) different from the serif effects provided for the time. Other effects different from the serif effects include that the conversation contents when the plurality of characters 80a and 80b exchange conversation are special contents, the appearance of a special character, and special effects for the plurality of characters 80a and 80b. The appearance of a background can be exemplified. Further, the second stage in the second stage presentation 104 to be executed later according to the operation content of the operation button 6 by the player within the effective period (1) to (3) of the single press operation acceptance during the execution of the suggestion presentation 103. The content of the effect executed in the scenario progress effect 105 may be limited. Specifically, in one example, in at least one single press operation reception valid period (1) to (3) of the three single press operation reception valid periods (1) to (3), the suggestion effect control unit When 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed, or when it is determined that a single stroke operation has not been performed, the operation reception valid period (T3 ₁ to T3 ₁ to the operation button 6 in the second stage scenario progress effect 105 in the second step effect 104). Even if the predetermined operation is performed in T4), execution of the predetermined effect to be performed after the predetermined operation may be limited. Here, “restricting the execution of the effect” includes not only performing the predetermined effect but also performing another effect different from the predetermined effect.

  Further, regardless of the operation of the operation button 6 by the player, based on the result of the special game determination, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage may be performed at a predetermined timing. In one example, the suggestion effect may be executed without prompting the player to perform an operation on the operation button 6, or the player is prompted to perform an operation on the operation button 6, and the suggestion effect is irrespective of whether or not the operation button 6 is operated. May be executed.

  Of course, since the suggestion mode by the line production in this embodiment is an example, you may make it suggest the expectation degree in which a scenario progress production will progress to the last stage in another suggestion mode.

At timing T3, the second stage effect control unit 76 functions to execute the second stage effect 104 within the second stage effect period (T3 to T6). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 105 from the timing T3, and after the second stage scenario progress effect 105, within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). When the player performs a long press operation on the operation button 6 or when the timing T4 is reached, the final result notification effect 106 is performed.

  As described above, the final result notification effect 106 includes the success effect 107 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, the failure effect 108 in which the scenario progress effect does not progress to the final stage, or the resurrection effect 110 after the failure effect 109. It is executed as a production. The success effect 107 continues until timing T6, and ends when timing T6 is reached. On the other hand, the failure effect 108 continues until timing T6 and ends when timing T6 is reached. The failure effect 109 continues until timing T5. When performing the failure effect 109, the resurrection effect 110 is started from the timing T5. This revival effect 110 continues until timing T6 and ends when timing T6 is reached.

  As described above, the first scenario effect pattern 781 is an effect pattern of 90 seconds performed within the period of the timings T0 to T6. If the success effect 107 or the revival effect 110 is finally performed, the first scenario effect pattern 781 shifts to the special game state ST2. This is a so-called confirmed effect that is notified to the player.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the title display 101 and the first-stage scenario progress effect 102 that are the first-stage effects 100 performed by the first-stage effect control unit 75. 20 shows only an example of a screen displayed on the image display 12, but a screen displayed on the image display 12 in some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 A linked production may be performed.

  When starting the execution of the scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781, the first stage effect control unit 75 first displays the title display 101 on the image display 12. In the title display 101, the player is notified of how to proceed with the scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781. In the example of FIG. 20, the message “Press the button to complete the RUSH constellation!” Is displayed, and a single-press operation that is not determined to be a long press operation with a continuous operation time of less than a predetermined time for the operation button 6 is performed. By doing so, it is informed that if the RUSH constellation can be finally completed, a game value advantageous to the player is given. That is, in the example of the scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781, a scenario for the purpose of finally completing the RUSH constellation progresses.

When starting the first stage scenario progress effect 102 after the title display 101, the first stage effect control unit 75 displays an initial screen 102a of the first stage scenario progress effect 102 on the image display 12 as shown in FIG. Display. In this initial screen 102a, the stars constituting the RUSH constellation are displayed in a blank state (in the example of FIG. 20, white), and the RUSH constellation is in an incomplete state. After such an initial screen 102a is displayed, when the start timing T1 ₁ of the single-pressing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) by the player is reached, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a predetermined operation on the initial screen 102a. An operation guide image 102a ″ for prompting the player to perform a single press operation on the operation button 6 is displayed in a superimposed manner on the region 102a ′. That is, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the player to perform a single press operation. A single-push instruction effect for informing that the single-push operation is possible is displayed. By displaying such an operation guide image 102a ", the player grasps that the single-push operation for the operation button 6 is effectively accepted. can do.

If the player performs a single-push operation on the operation button 6 within the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the first-stage effect control unit 75 proceeds to the next stage in which the scenario progress effect is advanced ( The first stage is determined, and the display screen of the image display 12 is changed from the initial screen 102a to the second screen 102b in response to accepting the single press operation within the effective period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). A single press effect is performed to change the. In this second screen 102b, a large number of meteors appear in the screen of the image display 12, and the stars are filled in a predetermined order with respect to the blank portion of the stars constituting the RUSH constellation (in the example of FIG. The unplugged part is colored black). In this way, the first stage effect control unit 75 advances the scenario progress effect to a predetermined next stage (first stage).

  FIG. 21A is a diagram showing the concept of processing by the first stage effect control unit 75, and shows the order in which meteors fill the RUSH constellation. FIG. 21B shows a first stage determined by the presence or absence of a single stroke pressing operation. First, when the first stage effect control unit 75 lights up the unlit stars constituting the RUSH constellation on the second screen 102b (when filling the blank stars), as shown in FIG. 21 (a). Light up the stars one by one in a predetermined order. That is, for the RUSH constellation, the progression order of the scenarios is determined in advance so that the constellation is completed one character at a time in the order of R constellation, U constellation, S constellation, and H constellation. In order to complete the RUSH constellation, all 26 unlit stars must be lit by meteors. Further, when determining the first stage in which the scenario progress effect is advanced, the first stage effect control unit 75 turns on 7, 10, 13, and 20 stars as shown in FIG. One lighting pattern is selected from the four lighting patterns. At this time, the first stage effect control unit 75 may select one lighting pattern from the four lighting patterns according to the result of the special game determination. For example, when the result of the special game determination is a big hit and the subsequent game state is shifted to the special game state ST2, the lighting pattern having more star lighting than the case of the special game determination result being lost. One lighting pattern may be selected such that the probability of selecting is increased.

  In addition, the 1st step production | generation control part 75 determines the next step which advances a 1st scenario progress production | generation to the step with the fewest number of lighting (lighting number 4), when single stroke pushing operation is not performed. For example, in the example of FIG. 21 (b), when the single stroke pressing operation is not performed, the next stage in which the first scenario progress effect is advanced is the number of lightings 4, which is the first scenario than when the single stroke pressing operation is performed. The progress degree of the progress effect is reduced.

  And the 1st step production | generation control part 75 changes the display screen of the image display 12 from the 2nd screen 102b to the 3rd screen 102c after progress for a predetermined time, after displaying the 2nd screen 102b. In the example shown in FIG. 20, among the RUSH constellations, the R constellation and the U constellation have been completed, and the S constellation and the H constellation have been left unfinished (the number of lighted stars has been increased). 13 states).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform a single-push operation on the operation button 6 within the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the first stage effect control unit 75 performs the single-push operation acceptance valid period ( After the elapse of T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the next stage in which the scenario progress effect is advanced is determined to be the minimum progress width (the number of star lights is 4). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 changes the display screen of the image display 12 from the initial screen 102a to the fourth screen 102d. In the fourth screen 102d, as in the second screen 102b, meteors appear on the screen of the image display device 12, and unlit stars constituting the RUSH constellation are turned on.

  In the fourth screen 102d when the single stroke pressing operation is not performed, the number of meteor appearances is smaller than that of the second screen 102b when the single stroke pressing operation is performed, and the scenario progresses more than the second screen 102b. You may make it alert | report that there is little progress degree of production. Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 advances the scenario progress effect by the minimum progression width (the number of star lights is four). When a predetermined time elapses after displaying the fourth screen 102d, the first stage effect control unit 75 changes the display screen of the image display 12 from the fourth screen 102d to the fifth screen 102e. At this time, as shown in FIG. 20, among the RUSH constellations, only the four stars of the R constellation are lit, and the scenario progress effect is advanced by the minimum progress width.

As described above, in the first stage scenario progress effect 102 based on the scenario effect pattern 78, when a single stroke operation by the player is accepted within the _single stroke press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the _single stroke operation is accepted. The first stage scenario progress effect 102 comes closer to the final stage than in the case where there is not. Therefore, the player positively performs a single stroke pressing operation in the first stage scenario progress effect 102 of the first stage effect 100.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a waveform example of the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) in the first stage scenario progress effect period. Here, the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 indicates the operation state of the operation button 6, that is, whether the operation button 6 is being operated or not. When the operation button 6 is being operated, the signal output from the operation button 6 is, for example, a high level signal indicating a switch-on state. On the other hand, when the operation button 6 is not operated, the signal output from the operation button 6 is, for example, a low level signal indicating a switch-off state. Therefore, the first stage performance control unit 75, based on a signal at one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 _2), one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ one-base hit pressed into the It can be determined whether or not there was.

In the waveform example shown in FIG. 22A, the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the off state to the on state after the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), and then changes from the on state to the off state. Change. In this waveform example, it can be determined that the operation state for the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has been released after the player has operated the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) and a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, the first stage effect control unit 75, when the continuous operation time in which the operation button switch 6b is in the on state after the on-edge is detected is less than the predetermined time, is the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 _2). ), It is determined that there has been a single press operation, and it is determined that there has been a long press operation when the continuous operation time is longer than a predetermined time. Specifically, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs the on-off edge ON signal number counter (the first signal stored in the ON signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) within the single-pressing operation reception valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). With reference to the storage area), it is determined that there has been a single press operation when the count number is less than a predetermined number from when the on-edge is detected to when the off-edge is detected. On the other hand, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the on-off edge on signal number counter within the single-pushing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), and the on-off edge on signal number counter has a predetermined value. It is determined that there has been a long press operation when the number is reached.

Further, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 22B, the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the off state to the on state and remains in the on state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). To do. In this waveform example, it can be determined that the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed while the player operates the operation button 6 (movable body 6a). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75, when the continuous operation time during which the operation button switch 6b is on after the on-edge is detected is less than a predetermined time, is a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1). _{In 2} ), it is determined that a single press operation has been performed, and it is determined that a long press operation has been performed when the continuous operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Specifically, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter, and when the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) ends, the count number is predetermined. When the number is less than the number, it is determined that a single press operation has been performed. On the other hand, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the on-off edge on signal number counter within the single-pushing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), and the on-off edge on signal number counter has a predetermined value. It is determined that there has been a long press operation when the number is reached.

On the contrary, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 22C, the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the on state to the off state within the _single stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). It will remain off. In this waveform example, the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is operated by the player before (at least at the start time) before the start of the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). It can be determined that the operation state for the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has been released after a lapse of a certain time from the start of the acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). In this waveform example, since the on-edge is not detected within the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the value of the on-off edge on signal counter remains “0” and the on-edge is not detected. Since the off-edge is detected, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that there is no single-press operation and long-press operation within the single-press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ).

Further, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (d), the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 is kept in the ON state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). In this waveform example, the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is operated by the player before (at least at the start time) before the start of the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). It can be determined that the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is continuously operated within the valid reception period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). In this waveform example, the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter value remains “0” within the effective period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) for accepting the single press operation, and neither the ON edge nor the OFF edge is detected. The first stage effect control unit 75 determines that there has been no single press operation and long press operation within the single press operation acceptance period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ).

Furthermore, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (e), the operation button switch 6b changes in the OFF state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). In this waveform example, it can be determined that the player has not operated the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) within the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). In this waveform example, the value of the on-off edge on signal counter remains “0” and neither the on edge nor the off edge is detected. In (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), it is determined that the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has not been operated (no operation).

Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not to change the execution mode of the effect in accordance with the operation status such as the single press operation, the long press operation, or the no operation in the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). Then, a command indicating the determined content is set in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c.

In this way, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs an operation on the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) by the player within the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) (on-edge is detected). In the waveform examples of FIGS. 22A and 22B in which the on-edge is detected, it is determined that there has been no single press operation except when the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is less than a predetermined time. In other words, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a single press even when the operation button 6 is operated in addition to the case where the player does not operate the operation button 6 (FIG. 22E). When the operation button 6 is in the operated state at the start of the operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) (FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (d)), it is determined that there has been no single press operation. Therefore, even if the first stage effect control unit 75 is in a state in which the operation button 6 is operated within the single-press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the operation is a long press operation or the like. If it is an irregular operation different from the single stroke pressing operation, the single stroke pressing operation is not determined. As a result, in the first-stage scenario progress effect 102 of the first-stage effect 100, the operation for the operation button 6 in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) is an irregular operation such as a long press operation. The first stage scenario progress effect 102 is performed as an effect that progresses by the minimum progress width. Therefore, even when the result of the special game determination is a big hit (when the subsequent game state is shifted to the special game state ST2), the operation for the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) When the operation on the button 6 is an irregular operation such as a long press operation, the possibility that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage is reduced. As a result, the player who determines the degree of expectation as to whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit based on the progress degree of the scenario progress effect is urged to advance the first stage scenario progress effect 102, and the operation button 6 can be prevented from performing an irregular operation.

In the example described with reference to the waveform example of FIG. 22, it is determined whether or not there is a long press operation in addition to the single press operation within the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). It is not always necessary to determine whether or not there is a long press operation. In this case, the off-edge is detected on the condition that the on-edge is detected regardless of the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) (see FIGS. 22A and 22B). (See FIG. 22C), or on the condition that both the on-edge and off-edge are detected (see FIG. 22A), it may be determined that a single stroke pressing operation has been performed. In the first-stage scenario progress effect of the first-stage effect 100, the first step is the maximum degree of advance determined on the condition that a continuous hitting operation is performed instead of a single-pressing operation. You may make it progress to.

  FIG. 23A is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the suggestion effect 103 performed by the suggestion effect control unit 74. FIG. 23A shows only a screen example displayed on the image display 12, but some or all of the components of the effect device 36 other than the image display 12 are displayed on the image display 12. You may make it produce the production | generation linked | linked with the screen.

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 103 after the first-stage scenario progress effect 102 described above, a single stroke for the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is displayed on the image display 12 as shown in FIG. The first single-stroke operation guide image 103a, the second single-stroke operation guide image 103c, and the third single-stroke operation guide image 103e in which two characters 80a and 80b appear in order to prompt the pressing operation are displayed every predetermined time. Are displayed in order. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 executes a single-stroke press instruction effect that notifies the player that a single-press operation is possible. The suggestion effect control unit 74 displays the first single press operation guide image 103a, the second single press operation guide image 103c, or the third single press operation guide image 103e, and then displays the single single press operation guide image 103a. , 103c, 103e, the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (1), the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), or the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (3) (see FIGS. 19 and 25). On the condition that it is performed, the single line effect screen 103b, the second line effect screen 103d, or the third line effect screen 103f is displayed on the image display 12 so as to change the effect execution mode. Run. In the first serif effect screen 103b, the first character 80a emits the first serif 81b, and in the second serif effect screen 103d, the second character 80b emits the second serif 81d. Then, on the third serif effect screen 103f, the first character 80a emits the third serif 81f. The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage according to the contents of the lines 81b, 81d, 81f generated by the plurality of characters 80a, 80b.

  FIG. 23 (b) shows the relationship between the contents of the lines generated by the plurality of characters 80a and 80b and the expected level. Here, the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period includes, for example, a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1), a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), and a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (3) (FIG. 19 and FIG. 19). 25).

  The lines 81b, 81d, and 81f generated by the plurality of characters 80a and 80b have four line patterns from a first line pattern to a fourth line pattern. The first serif pattern is the pattern with the lowest expectation that the scenario progressing effect will progress to the final stage. The second serif pattern is a pattern that has a higher expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage than the first serif pattern, and a medium expectation. The third serif pattern is a pattern with a relatively high expectation in which the scenario progress effect is further advanced than the second pattern. Further, the fourth serif pattern is a pattern that has the highest expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage, and suggests that the scenario progress effect has progressed to the final stage. Based on the result of the special game determination, the suggestion effect control unit 74 selects one serif pattern from these four serif patterns and sets the serifs 81b, 81d, 81f generated by the plurality of characters 80a, 80b. Production 103 is performed.

  Further, the first to third serif effects in which the characters 80a and 80b emit the lines 81b, 81d, and 81f are, as described above, the single-stroke press operation reception valid period (1) to (3) during the single-stroke press operation valid period (1) to (3). It is done on condition that it is done. Therefore, when the total number of single-pressing operations in the single-pressing operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) is three (single-pressing operation is performed in all of the single-pressing operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). In the case of the first to third lines). Further, when the total number of single-pressing operations in the single-pressing operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) is two (single-pressing operation in two periods of the single-pressing operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) Is performed), only the first and second dialogue effects are executed, and the total number of single-press operations in the single-press operation acceptance period (1) to (3) is one (single-press operation) In a case where the single stroke pressing operation is performed in one of the reception valid periods (1) to (3)), only the first speech effect is executed. When the total number of single-pressing operations in the single-pressing operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) is 0 (single-pressing operation is performed in any of the single-pressing operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). If not, none of the first to third serif effects is executed.

If the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the player has not performed a single stroke pressing operation in the first stage effect 100, even if the result of the special game determination is shifted to the special game state ST2, The suggestion effect control unit 74 may not select the fourth serif pattern among the four patterns. In this case, the suggestion effect 103 in the fourth serif pattern is performed on condition that the first step effect control unit 75 determines that a single stroke pressing operation has been performed in the first step scenario progress effect 102 of the first step effect 100. Therefore, the player will actively and appropriately perform the single-stroke operation within the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) of the first stage scenario progress effect 102. In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 does not request a single press operation on the operation button 6 by the player, and the first to third lines for each of the first screen 103a, the second screen 103b, and the third screen 103c. May be displayed sequentially.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the operation pattern for the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) and the serif effect in the suggestion effect 103. Specifically, FIG. 24A shows that the long press operation is performed in any of the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (1), the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), and the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (3). FIG. 24 (b) shows a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1), a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), and a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period ( 3 shows the relationship between the operation pattern and the line production when a long press operation is performed in any one of 3).

  Here, as described above, the first line production in which the character 80a emits the first line 81b, the second line production in which the character 80b emits the second line 81d, and the character 80a is the third line. A third line production that produces a line 81f is included. These first to third line effects are executed on the condition that a single press operation on the operation button 6 by the player is performed within the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). The single stroke pressing operation acceptance valid period corresponds to the presence of three serif effects, and exists three times within the suggested effect period as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the player performs a single stroke pressing operation on the operation button 6 during the three single stroke pressing operation reception valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggestive presentation period (T2 to T3). There are eight combinations of operation patterns 1-8.

  The operation pattern 1 corresponds to “with a single stroke pressing operation → with a single stroke pressing operation → with a single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 1, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → second dialogue production → third dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 1, in the suggestion effect 103, all of the first to third serif effects are performed.

  The operation pattern 2 corresponds to “with a single stroke pressing operation → with a single stroke pressing operation → without a single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 2, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → second dialogue production → no dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 2, in the suggestion effect 103, the first serif effect and the second serif effect are performed, and the third serif effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 3 corresponds to “with a single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation → with a single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 3, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → no dialogue production → second dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 3, in the suggestion effect 103, the first serif effect and the second serif effect are performed, and the third serif effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 4 corresponds to “with a single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 4, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 4, in the suggestion effect 103, only the first line effect is performed, and the second and third line effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 5 corresponds to “no single stroke pressing operation → with single stroke pressing operation → with single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 5, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → first dialogue production → second dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 5, in the suggestion effect 103, the first and second serif effects are performed, and the third serif effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 6 corresponds to “no single stroke pressing operation → single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 6, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → first dialogue production → no dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 6, in the suggestion effect 103, only the first line effect is performed, and the second and third line effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 7 corresponds to “no single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation → with single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 7, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → no dialogue production → first dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 7, in the suggestion effect 103, only the first line effect is performed, and the second and third line effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 8 corresponds to “no single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation → no single stroke pressing operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 8, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 8, none of the first to third serif effects is performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  As described above, in the case of the operation pattern 1 in which the single press operation is performed in all of the three single press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3), the first to third serif effects are all performed. Since all the first to third lines 81b, 81d, and 81f are displayed, information about the degree of expectation as to whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit can be obtained to the maximum. On the contrary, in the case of the operation pattern 8 in which the single press operation is not performed in all three single press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3), the first to third serif effects are all. Since none of the first to third lines 81b, 81d, 81f is displayed, information regarding the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage cannot be obtained.

  Further, in operation patterns 2, 3 and 5 in which the single stroke pressing operation is performed in two reception valid periods of the three single stroke pressing operation reception valid periods (1) to (3), the second line production is performed. Therefore, the first and second lines 81b and 81d are displayed, and the operation pattern 4 in which the single stroke pressing operation is performed in one reception valid period among the three single stroke pressing operation reception valid periods (1) to (3). , 6 and 7, only the first line 81b is displayed. That is, in the three single-pressing operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3), the greater the number of times the single-pressing operation is performed, the higher the expectation that the speech effect will progress and the scenario progressing effect will progress to the final stage. More suggested first to third lines 81b, 81d, 81f can be confirmed. Therefore, for a player who determines the degree of expectation as to whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit based on the progress level of the scenario progress effect, the single press operation is valid during the single press operation acceptance period (1) to (3). Can be encouraged.

Furthermore, when there is a long press operation within the valid period for accepting a single press operation, it is possible to limit the production such as speech production after the long press operation is performed. Here, “restricting production such as speech production after the long press operation is performed” means not only the single-press operation acceptance valid period after the long press operation is performed but also the suggestion production 103. In the long press operation effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) in the second stage effect 104 to be performed later, it is not determined whether or not there is a predetermined operation such as a single press operation or a long press operation on the operation button 6, and the predetermined Even if there is an operation, it includes at least not processing the predetermined operation. “Do not process if the predetermined operation has been performed” has no relation to the operation state of the operation button 6 after the long press operation is performed (even if there is a single press operation or a long press operation). ) In the operation reception period such as a speech effect, the predetermined effect associated with the reception of the predetermined operation is not executed, that is, the display mode is not changed at all by the reception of the predetermined operation. Including performing other effects.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (b), an operation pattern in which a long press operation is performed in any one of the three single-press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). If the operation after it is determined that the long-press operation has been made is unquestioned, there are seven patterns of operation patterns 9 to 15. In other words, the notation “-” in FIG. 24B means whether or not there is a long press operation and a single press operation (at least determination of a single press operation is not performed and processing is not performed as a single press operation). doing. Therefore, the portion with the notation “−” substantially includes three modes of “with a single press operation”, “with a long press operation”, and “without both a single press operation and a long press operation”. Yes.

  The operation pattern 9 corresponds to “there is a long press operation → no question for operation → no question for operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 9, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. That is, since the single press operation is not performed in the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) and the long press operation is performed, no line effect is performed corresponding to the single press operation acceptance valid period (1). In addition, since the long press operation is performed during the single stroke press operation reception valid period (1), the single stroke press operation reception valid period (2) and the single stroke press operation reception after the single stroke operation reception valid period (1) Line production after the expiration of the effective period (3) is limited. That is, when a long press operation is performed during the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (1), a line effect corresponding to the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (2) and the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (3) is performed. Absent. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 9, none of the first to third serif effects is performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  The operation pattern 10 corresponds to “with a single press operation → with a long press operation → no operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 10, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. In other words, since the single stroke pressing operation is performed in the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (1), the first speech effect corresponding to the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (1) is performed. And since the long press operation is performed in the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), the line effect corresponding to the single stroke press acceptance valid period (2) is not performed, and the single stroke press acceptance valid period (2 ) The line production corresponding to the single press operation acceptance valid period (3) after that is limited. In other words, when the long press operation is performed during the single stroke press operation acceptance valid period (2), the speech effect corresponding to the single stroke press operation acceptance valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 10, in the suggestion effect 103, the first serif effect is performed, and the second and third serif effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 11 corresponds to “no single press operation and long press operation → with long press operation → no operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 11, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. That is, since the single press operation corresponding to the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) is not performed, the first speech effect corresponding to the single press press reception valid period (1) is not performed. And since the long press operation is performed in the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), the line effect corresponding to the single stroke press acceptance valid period (2) is not performed, and the single stroke press acceptance valid period (2 ) The line production corresponding to the single press operation acceptance valid period (3) after that is limited. In other words, when the long press operation is performed during the single stroke press operation acceptance valid period (2), the speech effect corresponding to the single stroke press operation acceptance valid period (3) is not performed. Accordingly, in the case of the operation pattern 11, none of the first to third serif effects is performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  The operation pattern 12 corresponds to “single press operation is performed → single press operation is performed → long press operation is performed”. In the case of this operation pattern 12, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → second dialogue production → no dialogue production”. That is, since the single-stroke operation is valid in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) and the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) and the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period ( Line production corresponding to each of 2) is performed. And since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the line effect corresponding to the single press operation reception valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 12, in the suggestion effect 103, the first and second serif effects are performed, and the third serif effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 13 corresponds to “with a single press operation → no single press operation → with a long press operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 13, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “first dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. That is, since the single-stroke operation is performed in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) while the single-stroke operation is not performed in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) While the line production corresponding to is performed, the line production corresponding to the single press operation acceptance valid period (2) is not performed. And since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the line effect corresponding to the single press operation reception valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 13, in the suggestion effect 103, the first serif effect is performed, and the second and third serif effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 14 corresponds to “no single stroke press operation → single stroke press operation → long press operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 14, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → first dialogue production → no dialogue production”. That is, since the single-stroke operation is not performed in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) while the single-stroke operation is valid in the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period ( While the speech production corresponding to 1) is not performed, the speech production corresponding to the single-press operation acceptance valid period (2) is performed. And since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the line effect corresponding to the single press operation reception valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 14, in the suggestion effect 103, the first serif effect is performed, and the second and third serif effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 15 corresponds to “no single press operation → no single press operation → long press operation”. In the case of this operation pattern 15, the dialogue production pattern in the suggestion production 103 is “no dialogue production → no dialogue production → no dialogue production”. That is, since the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (1) and the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (2) are not performed, the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (1) and the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period ( No line production corresponding to 2) is performed. And since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the line effect corresponding to the single press operation reception valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 15, in the suggestion effect 103, all the first to third speech effects are not performed.

  In the suggestion effect 103, the first to third serif effects may be sequentially performed without requesting the player to operate the operation button 6, that is, regardless of the operation on the operation button 6. Further, in the suggestion effect 103, instead of using a single stroke pressing operation as a condition, a serif effect may be executed on the condition that a continuous pressing operation is performed. Furthermore, even if there is a long press operation within an operation reception valid period such as a single press operation reception valid period, it is possible not to limit the speech production after the long press operation is performed. In this case, the determination of the presence or absence of the long press operation within the single stroke press operation acceptance valid period may be omitted.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a waveform example of the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 in the single press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). The single stroke operation acceptance valid period in the suggestion presentation period (T2 to T3) is three times according to the maximum number of lines production as described above, and the single stroke push acceptance acceptance period (1) (T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ ), It includes a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2) (T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ ) and a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (3) (T2 _{5 to} T2 ₆ ).

The suggestion effect control unit 74 determines the single-stroke operation acceptance effective period (1), the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (2), or the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (3) based on the signal level of the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (3). In each of 1) to (3), it is determined whether or not a single stroke pressing operation or a long pressing operation has been performed. In this case, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not there is a single press operation and a long press operation in the first single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) in the first stage effect period (T0 to T2). This is the same as the determination method for the presence or absence of a single stroke pressing operation and a long pressing operation by the one-stage effect control unit 75.

  That is, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (a), the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the off state to the on state after the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). Change to state. On the other hand, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (b), the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 remains in the on state after the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 is changed from the off state to the on state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). Transition to. In these waveform examples, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to when the continuous operation time during which the operation button switch 6b is on after the on-edge is detected is less than a predetermined time. In (3), it is determined that a single press operation has been performed, and it is determined that a long press operation has been performed when the continuous operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time.

  In the waveform example shown in FIG. 25C, the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the on state to the off state and remains in the off state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). . In this waveform example, since the off-edge is detected without detecting the on-edge, the suggestion effect control unit 74 does not perform the single-stroke operation or the long-press operation within the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). It is determined that

  In the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (d), the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 is kept in the ON state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). In this waveform example, since the operation button switch 6b is in the on state and neither the on edge nor the off edge is detected, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs the single stroke pressing within the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (1) to (3). It is determined that there has been no operation or long press operation.

  In the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (e), the operation button switch 6b changes in the OFF state within the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). In this waveform example, since the operation button switch 6b is in the OFF state and neither the on-edge nor the off-edge is detected, the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation button within the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). 6 (movable body 6a) is determined not to have been operated (no operation).

  Then, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not to change the execution mode of the effect according to the operation situation such as the single press operation, the long press operation, or the no operation in each of the single press operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). Then, a command indicating the determined content is set in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c.

  In this way, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs an operation on the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) by the player during the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3), and the on-edge is detected. In the waveform examples of (a) and FIG. 25 (b), it is determined that there has been no single press operation except when the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is less than a predetermined time. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 accepts a single press operation even when the operation button 6 is operated in addition to the case where the player does not operate the operation button 6 (FIG. 25E). When the operation button 6 is in the operation state at the start of the effective periods (1) to (3) (FIGS. 25 (c) and 25 (d)), it is determined that there has been no single stroke operation. Therefore, even if there is an operation on the operation button 6 within the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3), the suggestion effect control unit 74 is different from the single-stroke operation such as a long-press operation. If it is a typical operation, it is not determined that the operation is a single press operation. As a result, in the suggestion effect 103, when the operation on the operation button 6 in the single-press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) is an irregular operation such as a long press operation, at least some of the serif effects are Not executed. Therefore, even if the result of the special game determination is a big hit (when the subsequent game state is shifted to the special game state ST2), the operations of the single-stroke operation acceptance period (1) to (3) When the operation with respect to the button 6 is an irregular operation such as a long press operation, the possibility that the characters 80a and 80b will advance to the third serif effect that emits the third serif 81f that is the final serif becomes low. Thus, the third line 81f is determined for the player who determines the expectation level of whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit based on the contents of the first to third lines 81b, 81d, 81f in the line effect. It is possible to prompt the user to advance the speech production to the third speech production that emits and suppress an irregular operation on the operation button 6.

  In the example described with reference to the waveform example of FIG. 25, the presence / absence of a long press operation in addition to the single press operation is determined within the single press operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). It is not always necessary to determine whether or not there is a long press operation. In this case, regardless of the operation time for the operation button 6 (movable body 6a), the detection of the off-edge is detected on the condition that the on-edge is detected (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b)). It may be determined that a single stroke pressing operation has been performed on condition (see FIG. 25C) or on condition that both on-edge and off-edge are detected (see FIG. 25A).

  FIG. 26 to FIG. 28 are diagrams illustrating an aspect of the second stage effect 104 performed by the second stage effect control unit 76. 26 to 28 show only screen examples displayed on the image display 12, but some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 are displayed on the image display 12. You may make it produce the production | generation linked | linked with the screen.

  Here, the second stage effect 104 includes a second stage scenario progress effect 105 and a final result notification effect 106 for notifying the final result of the scenario progress effect performed after the effect indicating the final result (see FIG. 19). This final result notification effect 106 includes three modes: a success effect 107 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, a failure effect 108 that does not progress to the final stage, and an effect that performs the revival effect 110 after the failure effect 109. .

In the second stage effect 104, when the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 105 after the suggestion effect 103 described above, as shown in FIG. The initial screen 105a of the scenario progress effect 105 is displayed. In this initial screen 105a, the constellation lighting state at the stage of progress in the first stage scenario progress effect 102 of the first stage effect 100 is displayed. And after displaying the initial screen 105a, becomes the start timing T3 ₁ long press operation accepting validity by the player _(T3 1 to T4), the second stage the performance control unit 76 hold the initial screen 105a The operation guidance image 105a ′ is displayed in a superimposed manner, and reception of a long press operation by the player is started. That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes a long press operation instruction effect that notifies the player that a long press operation is possible.

Then, when the player performs an operation on the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the second stage effect control unit 76 receives the operation of the operation button 6. Accordingly, a long press effect is performed in which the display screen of the image display 12 is changed from the initial screen 105a to the second screen 105b. On the second screen 105b, a large number of meteors again appear in the screen of the image display 12, and the stars are filled in a predetermined order with respect to the remaining blank portions constituting the RUSH constellation.

When the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the display screen of the image display 12 is displayed as the second screen. While transitioning from 105b to the third screen 105c, the scenario progress effect is gradually advanced to the final stage (constellation completion state).

  On the other hand, when the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the operation is not a long press operation even though the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is operated, the display screen of the image display device 12 is displayed. A state in which the progress of the scenario progress effect (the progress to the completion of the constellation) is less than when the long press operation is performed while transitioning from the second screen 105b to the fourth screen 105d (blank portion (unlit star) To the state where there is more. FIG. 26 shows an example in which the progress from the state of the second screen 105b to the completion of the constellation is not changed when the long press operation is not performed. Even when the long press operation is not performed, the degree of progress from the state of the second screen 105b to the completion of the constellation may be changed.

On the other hand, when the player has not operated the operation button 6, the second stage effect control unit 76 initializes the display screen of the image display 12 after the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed. Transition from the screen 105a to the fifth screen 105e. In the fifth screen 105e, no meteor appears in the screen of the image display 12, and the remaining display of the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) added to the long-press operation guide image as time passes is displayed. Only less. When the addition operation acceptance lifetime operation pushes without performing long for the operation buttons ₆ (T3 1 ~T4) has elapsed, the second stage the performance control unit 76, the display screen of the image display unit 12 from the fifth screen 105e Transition to 6 screen 105f. Even in the sixth screen 105f, no meteor appears in the screen of the image display 12, and only the remaining display of the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) added to the long press operation guide image is further reduced. It is displayed in the state. That is, when the long press operation is not performed, the second stage scenario progress effect 105 does not proceed.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the second stage scenario progress effect 105 is started and the timing T4 is reached, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the final result notification effect 106 of the scenario progress effect. That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the success effect 107, the failure effect 108, or the failure effect 109.

  FIG. 27 shows an aspect of the success effect 107 in the second stage effect. When performing the success effect 107 after the second-stage scenario progress effect 105, the second-stage effect control unit 76 turns on all the stars constituting the RUSH constellation and indicates that the scenario progress effect has reached the final stage. The screen 107a is displayed on the image display 12, and then the second screen 107b indicating that the RUSH constellation is completed is displayed on the image display 12. In this case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2 after the scenario effect pattern 78 ends.

  FIG. 28A shows one mode of the failure effect 108 in the second stage effect. When performing the failure effect 108 after the second-stage scenario progress effect 105, the second-stage effect control unit 76 does not light all the stars constituting the RUSH constellation, and the scenario progress effect has not reached the final stage. After the first screen 108a to be displayed is displayed on the image display 12, the second screen 108b indicating that the completion of the RUSH constellation has failed is displayed on the image display 12. In this case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is not changed from before that except for the case where the revival effect 110 is performed after the failure effect 109 described later.

  On the other hand, FIG. 28B shows an aspect in the case where the revival effect 110 is performed after the failure effect 109. When the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the failure effect 109 after the second stage scenario progress effect 105, the second stage 109b of the failure effect 109 is displayed on the image display 12 after a predetermined time has elapsed. The revival effect 110 is performed. When the revival effect 110 is performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2 after the scenario effect pattern 78 ends, as in the case where the scenario progress effect reaches the final stage.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a waveform example of the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 in the long press operation reception valid period in the second stage effect period.

FIG. 29A shows that the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) is operated by the player during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), and the operation state thereof is the operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). It is an example of a waveform at the time of continuing to completion | finish timing T4. If the operation time during which the operation state is continued (continuous operation time) is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that a long press operation has been performed. Specifically, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the on-off edge on signal number counter (first signal stored in the on signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) within the _single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Referring to (Area), since it can be determined that the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time when the count number after the on-edge is detected becomes a predetermined number, it is determined that there has been a long press operation. Such determination of the long press operation is performed in common with the first scenario effect patterns A to F.

FIG. 29B is a waveform example when a single press operation is performed on the operation button 6 a plurality of times within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the operation button 6 is normally operated a plurality of times within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Even if it is determined that the operation has not been performed, the long press operation is performed on condition that the operation information on the operation button 6 satisfies, for example, the specific conditions (1) to (3) described below. Performs the same processing as when

The specific condition (1) is that the total operation time for the operation button 6 is not less than a predetermined time within the long-press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). 29B, the operation time (T3 ₁₁ , T3 ₁₂ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₄ , T3 ₁₅ , T3 ₁₆ ) are sequentially added (T3 ₁₁ + T3 ₁₂ + T3 ₁₃ + T3 ₁₄ + T3 ₁₅ + T3 ₁₆ ), and when the total operation time exceeds a predetermined time, the long press operation is thereafter performed. The same processing as that performed is performed. Specifically, the second stage effect control unit 76 sets the cumulative ON signal number counter (the second storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c) within the _single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Referring to this, when the count number reaches a predetermined number, the same processing as when a long press operation is performed is performed thereafter. In other words, in the second stage effect control unit 76, the operation button 6 is operated until the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) ends or it is determined that there is a long press operation. All of the time is sequentially added, and this is used to determine whether or not the operation is equivalent to the case where a long press operation is performed. Such a determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern A, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns B to F.

The specific condition (2) is that the total operation time of the operations satisfying the first predetermined condition among the operations on the operation buttons 6 within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is a predetermined time or more. That is. As the “operation that satisfies the first predetermined condition” in the specific condition (2), for example, (1) when the operation button 6 is operated a predetermined number of times (including one time), the subsequent operation buttons 6 operation (2) operation for a specific time _(T3 1 to T3 ₃₎ the operation button 6 after elapsed from the start timing T3 ₁ long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) for, (3) the operation button 6 is a continuous operation in which the operation time is a specified time or more.

Regarding the determination based on the first predetermined condition (1), for example, when the predetermined number of operations on the operation button 6 is two times with reference to the waveform example of FIG. Since the first predetermined condition (1) is satisfied when 1) and (2) are performed, the continuous operation time (T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₄ ) for the operation button 6 after the single stroke pressing operation (2). , T3 ₁₅ , T3 ₁₆ ) are sequentially added (T3 ₁₃ + T3 ₁₄ + T3 ₁₅ + T3 ₁₆ ), and this is performed depending on whether or not the total operation time is a predetermined time or more. Specifically, the second stage effect control unit 76 sets the cumulative ON signal number counter (the second storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Referring to this, when the increment of the number of counts after the single stroke pressing operation (2) reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that the operation is equivalent to the case where the long pressing operation is performed, while the long pressing is performed. If the increment of the count number is less than the predetermined number at the end timing T4 of the operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), neither the long press operation nor the operation equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed is performed. judge. In such a determination, the count number at the time when the single stroke pressing operation (2) is performed is stored as an initial value, and the value obtained by subtracting the initial value from the count number updated thereafter is a predetermined number. The cumulative on signal number counter is updated (incremented) when the single stroke pressing operation (2) is performed, and the cumulative on signal number counter count is a predetermined number. It may be performed by determining whether or not. In other words, after the _single- stroke operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the second-stage effect control unit 76 ends the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) or performs a long-press operation. Until it is determined that the operation button 6 has been operated, all the time during which the operation button 6 has been operated is sequentially added, and whether or not an operation for performing the same processing as that in the case of performing a long press operation has been performed. Use for judgment. Such a determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern B, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A, C to F.

The determination based on the first predetermined condition (2) will be described with reference to the waveform example of FIG. 29 (b). From the start timing T3 _{1 of} the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), a specific time ( Since the first predetermined condition (2) is satisfied at the timing T3 ₃ when T3 _{1 to} T3 ₃ ) has elapsed, the operation time (T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₄ ) for the operation button 6 after the single stroke pressing operation (2). , T3 ₁₅ , T3 ₁₆ ) are sequentially added (T3 ₁₃ + T3 ₁₄ + T3 ₁₅ + T3 ₁₆ ), and this is performed depending on whether or not the total operation time is a predetermined time or more. Specifically, the second stage effect control unit 76 sets the cumulative ON signal number counter (the second storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). reference, while determines that the increased number of timing T3 ₃ after the number of counts there is an operation for performing processing that is equivalent to the case where long press operation it when it becomes the predetermined number has been performed, long press operation accepting valid If the increase in the count number is less than the predetermined number at the end timing T4 of the period (T3 _{1 to} T4), it is determined that neither the long press operation nor the operation for performing the same process as the long press operation is performed. In such a determination, stores the counted number as an initial value at timing T3 _3, to a value obtained by subtracting the initial value from the count number to be updated then it may be determined whether a predetermined number, starts updating of the accumulated oN signal counter (increment) at the timing T3 _3, counts the cumulative oN signal number counter may determine whether a predetermined number. In other words, until the second stage the performance control unit 76, after reaching the timing T3 _3, or operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is finished, is determined that the press and hold operation is All the time during which the operation button 6 is operated is sequentially added, and this is used to determine whether or not an operation for performing a process equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed is performed. Such a determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern C, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A, B, and DF.

The determination based on the first predetermined condition (3) is made by sequentially adding those having the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 longer than a specific time, and depending on whether or not the total operation time is longer than the predetermined time. Is called. For example, with reference to the waveform example of FIG. 29B, the continuous operation time of the single press operations (1), (2), and (6) in the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). If it is less than the specific time and the continuous operation time of the single press operation (3), (4) and (5) is longer than the specific time, the single press operation (3), (4) and (5) 1 predetermined condition (3) is satisfied. Therefore, the second stage effect control unit 76 sequentially adds the operation times (T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₄ , T3 ₁₅ ) of the single press operations (3), (4) and (5) (T3 ₁₃ + T3 ₁₄ + T3). ₁₅ ) It is determined whether or not an operation for performing a process equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed is performed depending on whether or not the total operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Specifically, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the on-off edge on signal number counter (the first memory of the on signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) within the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Area), when the count number reaches the specific number, it is determined that the continuous operation time is the specific time, and until the off-edge is detected or in the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) The number of ON signals is added until the end timing T4, and the number of ON signals is stored in the RAM 33c. In addition, when the number of ON signals whose continuous operation time is a specific time is already stored in the RAM 33c, the number of ON signals currently stored is updated to the count number obtained by adding the current ON signal number, and then the off edge Until the end timing T4 of the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is added, and the count number is updated. On the other hand, when the off-edge is detected when the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is less than the predetermined number, the duration time is less than the specific time, so that the operation time is not added. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs an operation equivalent to a case where a long press operation is performed when the total number of ON signals whose duration operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined that there was. Such a determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern D, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A to C, E, and F.

  Another example of the determination based on the first predetermined condition (3) is that the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is sequentially added and the continuous operation time is less than the specific time. Is added after the continuous operation time is multiplied by a predetermined multiple (multiple exceeding 1), and the total operation time is determined whether or not the predetermined time or more. Such a determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern E, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A to D, F.

The specific condition (3) is that the elapsed time after satisfying the second predetermined condition within a long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is a predetermined time or more. As the “second predetermined condition” in the specific condition (3), for example, a single stroke pressing operation is performed, a plurality of single stroke pressing operations (continuous stroke pressing operations) are performed, a long press operation acceptance For example, the specific time (T3 _{1 to} T3 ₃ ) has elapsed since the start of the effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Here, the single press operation in the specific condition (3) is an operation in which at least an on-edge is detected, an operation in which an off-edge is detected, or an on-edge and an off-edge are detected, and a time between these edges (continuous operation time). Is an operation for less than a predetermined time. Such a determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern F, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A to E.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the long press operation is not normally performed because the operation button 6 is operated a plurality of times within the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). Even if it is determined, it is determined that an operation for performing the same process as that performed when the long press operation is performed on condition that the operation state of the operation button 6 satisfies the specific condition is determined. For this reason, even when multiple single press operations such as continuous press operations that are not normally determined as long press operations are performed, the same processing as when a long press operation is performed may be performed. In this case, an effect that is executed on condition that a long press operation is performed is performed. Specifically, with reference to the embodiment shown in FIG. 26, if it is determined that a long press operation has not been performed when a plurality of single press operations have been performed, the display on the image display 12 is performed. The screen changes from the second screen 105b to the fourth screen 105d. On the other hand, the display screen changes from the second screen 105b to the third screen 105c when it is determined that an operation for performing a process equivalent to that performed when the long press operation is performed. In other words, by assuming that a long press operation was performed when multiple single stroke pressing operations were performed, a scenario progress effect that is not normally performed by multiple single stroke pressing operations is performed at the final stage (constellation completion state) ) Will be performed step by step gradually. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the interest during the presentation that proceeds with the long press operation as a trigger.

(First scenario progress effect control process)
Next, a processing procedure in the effect control board 33 when the first scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781 is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 53. FIG. 30 to FIG. 53 are flowcharts showing an example of the first scenario progress effect control process when a scenario progress effect is performed on the effect control board 33 based on the first scenario effect pattern 781.

  The first scenario progress effect control process corresponds to the fact that the first scenario effect pattern 781 includes the first stage effect 100, the suggestion effect 103, and the second stage effect 104, and the first stage effect control process, the suggestion effect control process, and A second stage effect control process is included. The first stage effect control process, the suggestion effect control process, and the second stage effect control process are executed by the first stage effect control unit 75, the suggestion effect control unit 74, and the second stage effect control unit 76, respectively.

  Specifically, when the first scenario progress effect process based on the first scenario effect pattern 781 is started, the effect control board 33 first causes the first stage effect control unit 75 to function as shown in FIG. When the timing T0 for starting the first stage effect 100 is reached (YES in step S1100), the first stage effect control process by the first stage effect control unit 75 is started (step S1101). Thereafter, when it is time T2 to start the suggestion effect 103 (YES in step S1102), the effect control board 33 causes the suggestion effect control unit 74 to function and starts the suggestion effect 103 by the suggestion effect control unit 74 (step S1103). . Thereafter, when the timing T3 for starting the second stage effect 104 is reached (YES in step S1104), the effect control board 33 causes the second stage effect control unit 76 to function, and the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the second stage effect. 104 is started (step S1105). When the process by the second stage effect control unit 76 ends, the first scenario progress effect control process ends.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the first stage effect control process (step S1101 in FIG. 30). When starting this process (Step S1200), the first stage effect control unit 75 starts a process of displaying the title display 101 on the image display 12 (Step S1201). Thereafter, when the predetermined time elapses and the timing T1 is reached (YES in step S1202), the first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first stage scenario effect progress process (step S1203).

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the detailed processing procedure of the first-stage scenario effect progress process (step S1203 in FIG. 31). Specifically, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an operation determination example for the operation button 6 in the first stage effect control process (step S1203 in FIG. 31). FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an effect execution method in the first stage effect control process (step S1203 in FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 32, the first stage performance control unit 75, when the start of the first stage scenario effect development processing a predetermined time becomes time T1 ₁ has elapsed, starting a one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity by the player (YES in step S1300). Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed (step S1301), and the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 _2). ) Has not elapsed (NO in step S1301), it is determined whether an on-edge has been detected (step S1302). That is, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c to determine whether or not the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has been operated. Whether such an on-edge has been detected is determined until it is determined that an on-edge has been detected (YES in step S1302), or it has been determined that the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed. Until it is repeated (YES in step S1301).

If it is determined that an on-edge has been detected within the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) (YES in step S1302), the first stage effect control unit 75 sets the first signal in the on-signal count storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c. It is determined whether or not the number of ON signals stored in one storage area (the count number of the ON signal number counter between ON and OFF edges) is a predetermined number (step S1303). That is, when the first stage effect control unit 75 can determine that the player has operated the operation button 6 by detecting the on-edge (YES in step S1302), based on the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges, It is determined whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more. Here, the count number of the ON signal counter between ON and OFF edges (the number of ON signals stored in the first storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d) is set by the operation control unit 66 at regular intervals (as described above). Since it is updated in a timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example, it is operated by an ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter (the number of signals stored in the first storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d). The continuous operation time for the button 6 can be grasped. Therefore, when the player operates the operation button 6 by determining whether or not the count number of the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter in the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number. It can be determined whether the operation is a single press operation or a long press operation.

When it is determined that the count number of the ON signal counter between on-off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1302), that is, when it can be determined that the count number of the on signal counter between on-off edges is less than the predetermined number, The one-stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the _single- stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed (step S1304). If the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has not elapsed (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not an off-edge has been detected (step S1305). If the off edge is not detected (NO in step S1305), the first stage effect control unit 75 returns to step S1303 and determines whether the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is a predetermined number (step S1303). YES) or until it is determined that the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed after the detection of the on-edge (YES in step S1304), or until it is determined that the off-edge has been detected (YES in step S1305). The determinations in steps S1303 to S1305 described above are repeated.

On the other hand, if an off-edge is detected (YES in step S1305), or if a single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed after the detection of on-edge (YES in step S1304), as shown in FIG. The first stage effect control unit 75 determines the progress stage from the first stage (lighting pattern “with operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1306), and performs the first stage scenario effect execution process (step S1308). . That is, when an off-edge is detected (YES in step S1305), or when a single stroke pressing acceptance acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed after detection of an on-edge (YES in step S1304), the counter between the on-off edges is counted. It can be determined that the number is less than the predetermined number (the continuous operation time is less than the predetermined time). Therefore, the first stage effect control unit 75 can determine that a single stroke pressing operation has been performed, and therefore determines the progress stage from the first stage (lighting pattern “with operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1306). .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, when it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1303), it is determined that the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Therefore, it can be determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, the first stage effect control unit 75 sets the progress stage to the first stage (lighting pattern “with operation” in FIG. 21B) as in the case where the single stroke pressing operation is performed. (Step S1306).

  It should be noted that it may be determined in advance how far the scenario progress effect is to be advanced by the single stroke pressing operation, for example, immediately after the processing based on the scenario effect pattern 78 is started. Also good.

On the other hand, if the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S1302) and the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control unit 75 As shown at 33, the progress stage is determined to be the minimum progress width (step S1307). That is, if the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that no on-edge has been detected (NO in step S1302) and no operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1301), the first stage presentation control unit 75 starts the progression stage from the first stage. Without determining, the progress stage is determined to be the minimum progress width (lighting pattern of “no operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1307).

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a first stage scenario effect progress process for advancing the scenario progress effect to the stage determined in step S1306 or step S1307 (step S1308). Specifically, while a large number of meteors appear in the screen of the image display 12, the star blanks constituting the RUSH constellation are filled in a predetermined order up to the stage determined in step S1306 or step S1307. As a result, if a single press operation or long press operation by the player is accepted, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds to the first stage, and if no operation by the player is received, the RUSH constellation is completed. The scenario progresses by the minimum progression width. Thus, the first stage effect control process ends.

  FIGS. 34 to 36 are flowcharts showing other examples of the first stage scenario presentation control process (step S1101 in FIG. 30) in the first stage presentation control process.

In the example shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, whether or not there is a single press operation and a long press operation on the operation button 6 in the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) is determined in the first stage scenario effect shown in FIG. This is done in the same way as the control process. On the other hand, if it can be determined that a long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed during the single stroke press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) (YES in step S1303), the effect execution method is the first stage scenario shown in FIG. This is different from the production execution method in the production system progression theory.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 34, when it can be determined that a single press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in the example shown in FIG. 32 (YES in step S1304 or S1305), the first stage effect control unit 75 Then, the progress stage is determined from the first stage (lighting pattern of “with operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1310). If it can be determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1303), or if it can be determined that no operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control The unit 75 determines the progression stage to be the minimum progression width (lighting pattern “no operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1311). That is, when it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed, the first stage effect control unit 75 processes that the long press operation and the single press operation have not been performed (assuming no operation).

  And the 1st step production | generation control part 75 performs the 1st step scenario production progress process which advances a scenario progress production to the stage determined by step S1310 or step S1311 (step S1312). Thus, if a single stroke operation by the player is accepted, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds to the first stage, and if a single stroke operation by the player is not accepted, or a long press operation is accepted. For example, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds by the minimum progression width. Thus, the first stage effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 35, when it can be determined that a single press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in the example shown in FIG. 32 (YES in step S1304 or S1305), the first stage effect control unit 75 proceeds to the progress stage. Is determined from the first stage (lighting pattern of “with operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1320). If it can be determined that the operation button 6 has not been operated (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control unit 75 sets the progression stage to the minimum progression width ("no operation" in FIG. 21B). Lighting pattern) is determined (step S1322). Furthermore, when it can be determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1303), the first stage effect control unit 75 determines a special effect (step S1321). That is, when it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed, the first stage effect control unit 75 processes the long press operation and the single stroke press operation (assuming they are special operations). Here, the “special effect” determined in step S1321 means an effect different from the effect that is executed when the progress stage is determined in steps S1320 and S1322. As the “special effect”, for example, an advancement stage is determined in the same manner as in step S1320 or step S1322, and an effect in which a meteor does not appear or a meteor appears when a blank part of a star constituting a RUSH constellation is filled is displayed. Different effects and effects different from the effects of filling the blank portion of the stars constituting the RUSH constellation (for example, cut-in effects, mini-character effects, black-out effects, effects that display the degree of expectation as a percentage) can be mentioned. In addition, as a “special effect”, instead of filling the blank portion of the stars constituting the RUSH constellation, or in addition to filling the blank portion, the driving of the movable accessory 14, the lamp 9 and the panel lamp 14a blinks, lights up, or turns off. Of course, you may make it perform productions other than the special production illustrated previously.

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 advances the scenario progress effect until the first stage determined in step S1320 or with the minimum progression width determined in step S1322, or executes the special effect determined in step S1321. . Thus, the first stage effect control process ends.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation determination for the operation button 6 in the first stage scenario progress effect control process based on the first scenario effect pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 36, a continuous hitting operation is accepted during a predetermined continuous hitting operation reception valid period, and it is determined whether or not there is a continuous hitting operation and a long press operation on the operation button 6 during the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period. , Which is different from the operation determination method in the first stage scenario presentation control process shown in FIG. That is, in the first stage scenario effect progress process shown in FIG. 32, it is determined whether or not there is a single press operation and a long press operation on the operation button 6 in the single press operation acceptance period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). In the example shown in FIG. 5, the presence / absence of a continuous pressing operation and a long pressing operation on the operation button 6 is determined in the continuous pressing operation reception period corresponding to the single pressing operation reception period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). On the other hand, the effect execution method in the case where it can be determined that the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed in the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period is the example shown in FIG. 33 or other examples shown in FIG. 34 or FIG. Similar to the example. Below, the case where the example shown in FIG. 33 is employ | adopted as an effect execution method when it can be determined that the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation was performed is demonstrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the first stage performance control unit 75, when the start of the first stage effect control process a predetermined time becomes time T1 ₁ has elapsed, starts pummel pressing operation accepting validity by the player (YES in step S1400). Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the continuous hitting operation reception valid period has elapsed (step S1401). If the continuous hitting operation reception valid period has not elapsed (NO in step S1401), It is determined whether an on-edge has been detected (step S1402). That is, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c to determine whether or not the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has been operated. Whether or not such an on-edge has been detected is determined until it is determined that an on-edge has been detected (YES in step S1402), or until it is determined that the continuous pressing operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S1401). ), Repeated.

  If it is determined that an on-edge has been detected within the continuous pressing operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S1402), the first stage effect control unit 75 is stored in the first storage area of the on-signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c. With reference to the number of ON signals, it is determined whether or not the count number of the ON-signal counter between ON and OFF edges is a predetermined number (step S1403). That is, when it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 6 by detecting the on-edge, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the count number of the on-signal counter between the on-off edges and thereby determines the operation button 6. It is determined whether or not a long press operation has been performed.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on signal counter between on-off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1403), that is, when it can be determined that the count number of the on signal counter between on-off edges is less than the predetermined number, The one-stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter (the number of on-edges stored in the second storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number (eg, “2”)). (Step S1404) If the count value of the cumulative on-edge counter is not a predetermined number (NO in Step S1404), does the first stage effect control unit 75 determine that the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period has elapsed? (YES in step S1401), the count number of the ON signal counter between ON and OFF edges is predetermined. Or determined to be (YES in step S1403), or the accumulated number of on-edge counter until it is determined that the predetermined number (YES in step S1404), the determination in step S1401~S1404 described above is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1404) or when the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1403), the first stage As shown in FIG. 33, the effect control unit 75 determines the progress stage from the first stage (lighting pattern “operation present” in FIG. 21B) (step S1306). That is, when the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation is performed, the progress stage is determined as the first stage (step S1306).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36, the continuous hitting acceptance valid period has passed without the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation being performed on the operation button 6 (YES in Step S1403 or Step S1404) (Step S1403). Since it can be determined that the operation button 6 has not been operated or a single stroke operation has been performed on the operation button 6 without determining the progress stage from the first stage as shown in FIG. The progression stage is determined to be the minimum progression width (lighting pattern “no operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1307).

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a first stage scenario effect progress process for advancing the scenario progress effect to the stage determined in step S1306 or step S1307 (step S1308). As a result, if a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation on the operation button 6 by the player is accepted, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds to the first stage, and the player's operation is not accepted, or the single hitting push is performed. If the operation is performed, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds by the minimum progression width. Thus, the first stage effect control process ends.

  In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 33 about the effect execution method after determining the presence or absence of continuous pressing operation and long press operation was demonstrated, about the said effect execution method, the effect execution shown as another example in FIG. 34 or FIG. It may be a technique or any other method. In the case of the effect execution method shown as another example in FIG. 34 or FIG. 35, if it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed, the first stage effect control unit 75 assumes that there has been no long press operation and no single press operation (no operation). Alternatively, it may be processed (assuming that it is a special operation), and an effect similar to the case of no operation may be executed or a special effect may be executed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion effect control process (step S1103 in FIG. 30).

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect control process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 first refers to the result of the special game determination performed by the special game determination unit 52 (step S1500), and based on the special game determination result, the plurality of characters 80a. , 80b, one of the four patterns shown in FIG. 23B is selected, and the selected serif pattern is determined as a serif pattern to be performed as the suggestion effect 103 (step S1501). At this time, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 uses, for example, three patterns of the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern as selection candidates, The third pattern is selected with a higher probability than the second pattern, and the fourth pattern is selected with a higher probability than the third pattern. If the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 uses, for example, three patterns of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern as selection candidates, and the third pattern The second pattern and the first pattern are selected with a higher probability than the second pattern. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines the serif pattern to be performed as the suggestion effect 103 as described above, based on the serif pattern and the presence / absence of a single press operation on the operation button 6 by the player, FIG. The suggestion effect 103 as shown is started (step S1502).

  38 and 39 are flowcharts showing an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion effect progress process (step S1502 in FIG. 37). In this suggestion effect progress process, three single-stroke operation acceptance valid periods are provided, and in each single-stroke operation acceptance valid period, the presence or absence of single-stroke operation and long-press operation is determined. And the determination method of the presence or absence of long press operation is the same as that of the case of the 1st step scenario effect progress process demonstrated with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect progress process at the timing T2, first, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets “3” in the reception operation counter of the RAM 33c (step S1600). That is, the acceptance of the single press operation is performed three times within the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). Note that the number to be set in the reception operation counter may be set according to the number of receptions of the single press operation to be executed. Then, the suggestion effect control unit 74 selects one serif effect pattern from the first to fourth serif effect patterns (step S1601).

  Thereafter, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts accepting a single stroke pressing operation (step S1602), and then subtracts “1” from the value of the accepting operation counter (step S1603). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 subtracts “1” from the value of the reception operation counter every time reception of a single stroke pressing operation is started.

  Next, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period corresponding to the count number of the reception operation counter has elapsed (step S1604), and the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period has elapsed. If it is determined that there is no on-edge (NO in step S1604), it is determined whether an on-edge has been detected (step S1605). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 refers to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c to determine whether or not the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has been operated. Whether such an on-edge has been detected is determined until it is determined that an on-edge has been detected (YES in step S1605), or until it is determined that the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (in step S1604). YES), repeated.

  If it is determined that an on-edge has been detected within the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S1605), the suggestion effect control unit 74 stores the on-state stored in the first storage area of the on-signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c. -It is determined whether or not the count number of the off signal counter between the off edges is a predetermined number (step S1606). That is, if the suggestion effect control unit 74 can determine that the player has operated the operation button 6 by detecting the on-edge (YES in step S1605), the operation button is controlled based on the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges. It is determined whether the continuous operation time for 6 is a predetermined time or more. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the count number of the on signal counter between the on-off edges of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, and when the player operates the operation button 6, It can be determined whether the operation is a single press operation or a long press operation.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1606), that is, when it can be determined that the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges is less than the predetermined number The effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the single press operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (step S1607). If the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period has not elapsed after detection of the on-edge (NO in step S1607), it is determined whether an off-edge has been detected (step S1608). If no off edge is detected (NO in step S1608), the suggestion effect control unit 74 returns to step S1606, and determines whether the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1606). ), Until it is determined that the single-pressing operation acceptance valid period has elapsed after detection of the on-edge (YES in step S1607) or until it is determined that an off-edge has been detected (YES in step S1608), steps S1606 to S1 described above The determination in S1608 is repeated.

  On the other hand, if an off-edge is detected (YES in step S1608), or if the single-pressing operation acceptance valid period has elapsed after the detection of on-edge (YES in step S1607), the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is less than the predetermined time. Since it can be determined that the single press operation has been performed, as shown in FIG. 39, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a speech effect execution process (step S1610). Thereafter, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the count number of the reception operation counter is “0” (step S1611).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, when it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1606), it is determined that the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Therefore, it can be determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6. Therefore, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the long press operation flag (step S1609), and then the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the count number of the reception operation counter is “0” as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1611).

  Here, the “long press operation flag” is referred to in step S1700 (FIG. 40) of the dialogue effect execution process in the suggestion effect described later. That is, when a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in at least one period of the single-press operation acceptance period (1) to (3) of the suggestion effect, and the “long-press operation flag” is set, the single press operation Execution of the speech production for the operation of the operation button 6 during the operation reception valid period is restricted, and execution of the speech production for the operation of the operation button 6 during the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period after the single-stroke operation acceptance validity period is restricted. The This “long press operation flag” is also referred to in step S2208 or S2211 (FIG. 45) of the final result notification effect execution process in the second stage effect described later. That is, when the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in at least one period of the single-press operation acceptance period (1) to (3) of the suggestion effect and the “long press operation flag” is set, the second stage Execution of the success effect 107 of the final result notification effect execution process in the effect is restricted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S1605) and the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S1604), the suggestion effect control unit 74 receives the acceptance operation counter. It is determined whether or not the count number is “0” (step S1611). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the three single-pressing operation reception valid periods have ended.

  If it is determined that the count number of the reception operation counter is not “0” (YES in step S1611), the suggestion effect control unit 74 returns to step S1602 in FIG. 38 and performs the determination from step S1602 to step S1610 in FIG. The process is repeated until it is determined in S1611 that the count of the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in Step S1611).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the speech effect execution process in the suggestion effect progress process (step S1610 in FIG. 39).

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the dialogue effect execution process is started, first, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the long press operation flag is set (step S1700). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 during the single-press operation accepting period and the previous single-press operation acceptance valid period in the suggestive effect 103. If the long press operation flag is not set (NO in S1700), the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the second serif effect has been executed (step S1701). If the second line effect has not been executed (NO in step S1701), the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the first line effect has been executed (step S1702), and the first line effect is performed. Is not executed (NO in step S1702), the first line effect is executed (step S1703). That is, when the long press operation is not performed on the operation button 6 in the single press operation reception period and the previous single press operation reception valid period in the suggestion effect (NO in step S1700), the first serif effect and the second When neither of the line effects is executed (NO in steps S1701 and S1702), the first line effect is executed (step S1703).

  If the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S1700), the second line effect is not executed (NO in step S1701), and the first line is already executed (in step S1702). YES), the suggestion effect control unit 74 executes the second serif effect (step S1704).

  Further, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S1700), when the second serif effect is being executed (YES in step S1701), the suggestion effect control unit 74 executes the third serif effect. (Step S1705).

  On the other hand, if the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S1700), the line effect is executed without executing any of the first line effect, the second line effect, and the third line effect. The process ends. When the dialogue effect execution process is completed, when the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the value of the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in step S1604), the suggestion effect process is ended.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts illustrating another example of the suggestion effect progress process in the suggestion effect control process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the presence / absence of the single-stroke operation and the long-press operation on the operation button 6 during the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period is determined in the same manner as the suggestion effect progression process shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the effect execution method when it can be determined that a long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed in the single press operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S1606) This is different from the production execution method in the one-stage scenario production system progression process.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 41, when it can be determined that a single stroke pressing operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in the example illustrated in FIG. 38 (YES in step S1607 or S1608), or it is determined that a long pressing operation has been performed. If possible (YES in step S1606), suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a serif effect execution process (step S1800). That is, in the suggestion effect progress process of this example, it is possible to determine that a long press operation has been performed, not only when it can be determined that a single press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed in the single press operation acceptance period (YES in step S1607 or S1608). In the case (YES in step S1606), the speech effect is also executed.

  Here, the speech production execution process of this example is performed basically in the same manner as the speech production process shown in FIG. However, in the serif effect execution process, when a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6, the first serif effect, the second serif effect, and the third serif effect are the same as when the single stroke press operation is performed. Therefore, the determination as to whether the long press operation flag is set in step S1700 is omitted.

  Then, until it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” in S1801 of FIG. 41 (YES in Step S1801), the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs Steps S1602 to S1609 shown in FIG. 38, Steps S1800 shown in FIG. S1801 is repeated, and when it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in step S1801), the suggestion effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 42, when it can be determined that a single stroke pressing operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in the example shown in FIG. 38 (YES in step S1607 or S1608), a speech effect execution process is performed (step S1900). The serif effect execution process of this example is performed in the same manner as the serif effect process shown in FIG.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when it can be determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1606), the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a special speech effect execution process (step S1901). As special speech production, for example, the characters 80a and 80b emit special speech that is not defined in the first to fourth speech patterns (for example, “Long press!”, “Press it!”). Directed. Other special serif effects other than such effects include, for example, an effect in which the character color of the serif, the color of the serif frame, the color in the serif frame, the background color of the characters 80a and 80b, etc. are different from the usual, and the mini character Appearance of the character 80a, 80b on the side that emits the speech, and an effect that the characters 80a, 80b emit the speech are displayed. The character can be enlarged as a cut-in effect.

  Then, until it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” in S1902 in FIG. 42 (YES in Step S1902), the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs Steps S1602 to S1609 illustrated in FIG. 38 and Step S1900 illustrated in FIG. S1902 is repeatedly performed, and when the reception operation counter is determined to be “0” (YES in step S1902), the suggestion effect process is terminated.

  In addition, when it can be determined that a long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed during the single-press operation accepting period of the suggestion effect, instead of performing the special serif effect, an effect different from the serif effect (for example, a cut-in effect without a serif, (Self-free mini character production, blackout production, production of percentage display of expectation) may be executed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the second stage effect control process (step S1105 in FIG. 30).

  When the second stage effect control process is started, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs a second stage scenario effect progress process (step S2000), and then performs a final result notification effect execution process (step S2001).

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of the second-stage scenario effect progress process based on the first scenario effect pattern A in the first scenario progress effect control process.

In the first scenario effect pattern A, all the operation times during which the operation on the operation button 6 is performed in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) are added, and the added value of the operation times (total operation time) Is processed in the same manner as when a long press operation is performed when is longer than a predetermined time. Here, the addition of all the operation times is not limited to the case where the operation button 6 is continuously operated, and even when the operation buttons 6 are operated intermittently, all the operation times related to all the operations are added. Means to add.

As shown in FIG. 44, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern A is made to the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving The effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2100).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2100), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not an on-edge is detected (step S2101), and the second stage first. On condition that the stage scenario initial presentation is not executed (NO in step S2102), the second stage scenario initial presentation is executed (step S2103).

  In the second stage scenario initial effect progress process, the progress degree of the scenario progress effect is greater than when the long press operation is performed while the display screen of the image display 12 is changed from the initial screen 105b to the second screen 105b. Advance to a state where the degree of progress toward completion of the constellation is small (a state where there are more blank parts (unlit stars)). Whether or not the on-edge is detected (step S2001) is determined by the second stage effect control unit 76 referring to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c.

On the other hand, when the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2103), it is then determined whether or not the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2104). Similarly, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2101), or the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect is already executed (YES in step S2102), the long press operation acceptance valid period It is determined whether (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2104).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2104), the second stage effect control unit 76 stores the first storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c. It is determined whether or not the number of on signals (the number of on-off edge on signal counters) is a predetermined number (step S2105). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more based on the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off-edge on-signal counter in the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, so that when the player has operated the operation button 6, It can be determined whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2105), that is, when the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges can be determined to be less than the predetermined number, The two-stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter stored in the second storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number (step S2106). Here, the count number of the cumulative ON signal number counter is updated by the operation control unit 66 in the timer interruption process executed at regular intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds) by the effect control board 33 as described above, and is turned on edge. Alternatively, the number of sampling of the switch-on signal is accumulated (added) regardless of the detection of the off-edge. Therefore, the second stage effect control unit 76 refers to the count number of the cumulative ON signal number counter, so that even if the operation button 6 is operated intermittently, the total operation time ( Total operation time).

If the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2106), the second stage effect control unit 76 sets the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter or the cumulative on signal number counter to a predetermined number. Steps S2104 to S2106 described above until it is determined that there is (YES in Step S2105 or 2106) or until it is determined that the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has passed (YES in Step S2104) Repeat.

When the count number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2105), the second stage effect control unit 76 is shown in FIG. Thus, on condition that the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208), the second stage is determined as the progress stage (step S2209). This second stage is determined with reference to an effect selected as a final result notification effect to be described later. For example, when the success effect 107 is selected as the final result notification effect, the second stage is selected that proceeds to the stage where all of the star blanks constituting the RUSH constellation are filled. On the other hand, when the effect that performs the resurrection effect 110 after the failure effect 108 or the failure effect 109 is selected, the stage that has not reached the second stage is selected. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes a second stage scenario effect progress process in which the blank portions of the stars are filled in a predetermined order until a predetermined stage (step S2210), and the second stage scenario effect progress process Exit.

Similarly, when the count value of the cumulative ON signal number counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2106), the second stage effect control unit 76 is shown in FIG. On the condition that the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208), the second stage is determined as the progress stage (step S2209), and the second stage scenario effect progress process is executed (step S2210). . That is, when the count value of the ON signal counter between ON and OFF edges is a predetermined number during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2105), that is, the operation button 6 continues for a predetermined time or more. However, not only when the operation is performed, but even when an intermittent operation is normally performed on the operation button 6 that is not determined to be a long press operation, if the total operation time is a predetermined time or more By performing the same process as when the long press operation is performed, an effect is executed that is executed on the condition of the long press operation (step S2210), and the second-stage scenario effect progress process is terminated.

Thus, even when the cumulative value of the operation time for the operation button 6 in the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the long press for which the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is the predetermined time. By performing the same processing as the operation, even if the operation button 6 is repeatedly pressed during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) or the start of the operation on the operation button 6 is delayed. An effect equivalent to the case where a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by a continuous operation for a predetermined time or longer is executed. As a result, even if a player who has insufficient knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the long press operation is performed. By performing an effect that is executed on the condition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 1 that can be fully enjoyed.

  Although the second stage has been described on the assumption that the final result notification effect described later has already been determined, the final result notification effect may be determined at the stage of performing the final result notification effect process. The second stage may be determined depending on whether or not the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2.

On the other hand, even if the count number of the ON signal number counter between ON and OFF edges or the cumulative ON signal number counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2105 or S2106) When the long press operation flag is set in step S2208 (YES in step S2208), the minimum progress width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212). This minimum progress width is a progress width that does not reach the second stage, and corresponds to the minimum selection width that is selected when it can be determined that a long press operation has been performed. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes a second stage scenario effect progress process in which the blank portions of the stars are filled in a predetermined order until a predetermined stage (step S2210), and the second stage scenario effect progress process Exit.

Here, the long press operation flag is a long press operation in at least one single press operation reception valid period of the three single press operation reception valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggestive effect process as described above. This is set when the operation is performed (step S1609 in FIG. 38). Therefore, even if the count number of the on-off edge on signal counter or the cumulative on signal counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2105 or S2106) That is, even if the operation button 6 is operated as a long press operation or an operation that is regarded as a long press operation during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the single press operation reception of the suggestive effect process is valid. If a long press operation is performed in the periods (1) to (3), execution of effects in the second stage scenario progress effect is restricted. That is, when a long press operation is performed during an acceptance period of an operation other than the long press operation in an effect period different from the second stage effect 104 (for example, a single press operation or a continuous press operation), the second stage effect control unit 76 The long press effect in the second stage effect 104 (second stage scenario progress effect 105) may not be executed.

On the other hand, when the operation button 6 is operated during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) but the operation is not the long press operation (NO in step S2107 in FIG. 44), the second stage As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control unit 76 determines that the minimum progress width is set as the progress stage (NO in step S2211) on the condition that the long press operation flag is not set (step S2211), and the second stage scenario. The effect progress process is executed (step S2210), and the second-stage scenario effect progress process is terminated. In addition, if the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2211), the second stage effect control unit 76 proceeds in the first stage without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second stage scenario effect execution process. Without proceeding from the stage), the second stage scenario effect progress process is terminated.

Similarly, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the progress stage when the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed without any operation on the operation button 6 (YES in step S2107 in FIG. 44). The second stage scenario presentation progress process is terminated without performing the determination and the second stage scenario presentation execution process.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of the final result notification effect execution process in the second stage effect control process.

  When starting the final result notification effect execution process, the second stage effect control unit 76 first determines whether or not the effect selected as the final result notification effect is the success effect 107 (step S2300). If it is selected (YES in step S2300), the success effect 107 is executed. The success effect 107 is, for example, a second screen 107b (2) indicating that the RUSH constellation is completed by changing the screen display from the first screen 107a on which the RUSH constellation displayed on the image display 12 in the second stage scenario effect is completed. For example, it is performed by displaying a screen such as “Completion of constellation!” In FIG.

  On the other hand, when the success effect 107 is not selected as the final result notification effect (NO in step S2300), it is determined whether or not the effect selected as the final result notification effect is the failure effect 108 (step S2302). If the effect 108 is selected (YES in step S2302), the failure effect 108 is executed. The failure effect 108 is, for example, a second display indicating that the RUSH constellation is not completed by changing the screen display from the first screen 108a in which the RUSH constellation displayed on the image display 12 in the second stage scenario effect is not completed. This is performed by displaying a screen 108b (for example, a screen such as “sorry failure!” In FIG. 29A).

  If neither the success effect 107 nor the failure effect 108 is selected as the final result notification effect (NO in step S2302), the resurrection effect 110 is executed after executing the failure effect 109 (step S2304). This failure effect 109 is similar to the failure effect 108 described above, for example, by transitioning the screen display from the first screen 109a in which the RUSH constellation displayed on the image display device 12 in the second stage scenario effect is incomplete. This is performed by displaying a second screen 109b (for example, a screen such as “sorry failure!” In FIG. 29B) indicating that the constellation is not completed. On the other hand, the revival effect 110 is performed by displaying the third screen 110b indicating the success as a result when a predetermined time elapses after the second screen 109b is displayed and the timing T5 is reached.

  As described above, the resurrection effect 110 is performed after the success effect 107, the failure effect 108, or the failure effect 109, and the final result notification effect is ended at the timing T6.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the second-stage scenario effect progress process based on the first scenario effect pattern B in the first scenario progress effect control process.

In the first scenario effect pattern B, all the operation times after the continuous pressing operation is performed on the operation button 6 in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) are added, and the added value of the operation time ( The processing is equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed when the total operation time) is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Here, adding all of the operation times is not limited to the case where the operation button 6 is continuously operated, and even when the operation button 6 is operated intermittently, the operations related to all operations after the continuous pressing operation are performed. Means adding all of the time.

As shown in FIG. 47, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern B is made to the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving The effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2400).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2400), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether an on-edge has been detected (step S2401), On condition that the stage scenario initial presentation is not executed (NO in step S2402), the second stage scenario initial presentation is executed (step S2403).

On the other hand, when the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2403), it is then determined whether or not the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2404). Similarly, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2401), or when the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2402), the long press operation acceptance valid period It is determined whether (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2404).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2404), the second-stage effect control unit 76 counts the on-off edge on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c. Is a predetermined number (step S2405). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more based on the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off-edge on-signal counter in the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, so that when the player has operated the operation button 6, It can be determined whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2405), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter stored in the RAM 33c is the predetermined number. It is determined whether or not the above is true (step S2406). Here, the cumulative on-edge counter indicates the number of times that the operation button 6 has been operated as described above. Therefore, the second stage effect control unit 76 can determine whether or not the operation button 6 has been repeatedly pressed by referring to the cumulative on-edge number counter. The “predetermined number” in the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter in this case may be any number that can determine that the operation on the operation button 6 is the continuous pressing operation, and is selected from an integer of “2” or more.

When the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined number (YES in step S2406), that is, when it can be determined that the operation button 6 has been repeatedly pressed in the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). The second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the increment number of the cumulative on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number after it is determined that the count number of the cumulative on edge number counter is the predetermined number. It is determined whether or not (step S2407). The increase number of the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is an increase number from the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter when the count number of the cumulative on edge number counter becomes a predetermined number. Therefore, the increment number of the cumulative on-edge number counter stores the count number of the cumulative on-signal number counter when the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter reaches a predetermined number. It can be calculated by subtracting the count number from the count number of the current cumulative ON signal number counter. Also, when the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter reaches a predetermined number, the increase number may be grasped by operating a counter that counts the increase number of the cumulative on-signal number.

Second stage effect control unit when the increment number of the cumulative on signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2407), or when the count number of the cumulative on edge number counter is less than the predetermined value (NO in step S2406) 76, whether the increment number of the on-signal counter between the on-off edges or the cumulative on-signal counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2405 or 2407), or the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3) Steps S2401 to S2407 described above are repeated until it is determined that _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (YES in Step S2404).

Then, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2405), or continuous hitting When the increment number of the cumulative ON signal number counter after the operation is performed is a predetermined number (YES in step S2407), when the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (step The second stage is determined as the progress stage (NO in S2208) (step S2209), and when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum progress width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

As described above, even when the cumulative value of the operation time for the operation button 6 after the continuous pressing operation in the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is predetermined. By performing the same processing as the long press operation, which is the time, the continuous push operation is performed on the operation button 6 during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), or the start of the operation on the operation button 6 is delayed. Even in this case, an effect equivalent to the case where a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by a continuous operation for a predetermined time or longer is executed. As a result, even if a player who has insufficient knowledge of the gaming method performs an operation other than the long press operation during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the gaming machine 1 that can be fully enjoyed is provided. Can be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs an operation on the operation button 6 during the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), but the operation is not a long-press operation (step When the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211), the second stage production control unit 76 determines the minimum progression width as the progression stage (step S2212), as shown in FIG. Second stage scenario effect execution processing is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the operation button 6 is not operated in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2408), FIG. As shown, the second-stage scenario presentation progress process is terminated without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second-stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage advanced in the first stage).

  Further, the second stage effect control unit 76 ends the first scenario progress effect control process by executing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after the second stage scenario effect progress process is ended.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the second stage scenario effect progress process based on the first scenario effect pattern C in the first scenario progress effect control process.

In the first scenario effect pattern C, all the operation times after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) are added, and the added value of the operation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. The process is the same as when a long press operation is performed. Here, adding all of the operation times is not limited to the case where the operation button 6 is continuously operated, and even when the operation button 6 is operated intermittently, the operations related to all operations after the continuous pressing operation are performed. Means adding all of the time.

As shown in FIG. 48, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario effect pattern C is timing T3 ₁ has elapsed, Long press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving The effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2500).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2500), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether an on-edge has been detected (step S2501), and the second stage first. On condition that the stage scenario initial presentation is not executed (NO in step S2502), the second stage scenario initial presentation is executed (step S2503).

On the other hand, when the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2503), it is determined whether or not the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2504). Similarly, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2501), or when the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2502), the long press operation acceptance valid period It is determined whether (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2504).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the second-stage effect control unit 76 counts the on-off edge on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c. Is a predetermined number or not (step S2505). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more based on the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off-edge on-signal counter in the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, so that when the player has operated the operation button 6, It can be determined whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

When it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2505), the second stage effect control unit 76 starts from the start of the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S2506).

When the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2506), the second stage effect control unit 76 sets the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the above, it is determined whether or not the increment number of the cumulative ON signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number (step S2507). The increment number of the cumulative ON signal number counter can be calculated in the same manner as in the case of the first scenario effect pattern B.

When the increment of the count number of the cumulative ON signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2507), or when a predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (step S2506) The second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the increment number of the on-signal counter between on-off edges or the cumulative on-signal counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2505 or 2507). ), Until it is determined that the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (YES in step S2504), steps S2501 to S2507 described above are repeated.

Then, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2505), or long press If the increment number of the cumulative ON signal number counter after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is a predetermined number (YES in step S2507), the long press operation flag is set. If not (NO in step S2208 in FIG. 45), the second stage is determined as the progress stage (step S2209), and when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208 in FIG. 45), the progress stage is the minimum The progress width is determined (step S2212).

Thus, even when the cumulative value of the operation time for the operation button 6 after the elapse of the predetermined time in the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is predetermined. By performing the same processing as the long press operation, which is the time, the continuous push operation is performed on the operation button 6 during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), or the start of the operation on the operation button 6 is delayed. Even in this case, an effect equivalent to the case where a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by a continuous operation for a predetermined time or longer is executed. As a result, even if a player who has insufficient knowledge of the gaming method performs an operation other than the long press operation during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the gaming machine 1 that can be fully enjoyed is provided. Can be provided.

In addition, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs an operation on the operation button 6 during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), but the operation is not a long press operation (NO in step S2508), FIG. As shown in 45, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the minimum progress width as the progress stage (step S2212), and executes the second stage scenario effect. Processing is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the operation button 6 is not operated in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2508), FIG. As shown, the second-stage scenario presentation progress process is terminated without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second-stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage advanced in the first stage).

  Further, the second stage effect control unit 76 ends the first scenario progress effect control process by executing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after the second stage scenario effect progress process is ended.

  49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the second-stage scenario effect progress process based on the first scenario effect pattern D in the first scenario progress effect control process.

In the first scenario effect pattern D, the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is added to all the operation times not less than the specific time not corresponding to the long press operation. The processing is equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed when the added value of the time is equal to or longer than the second predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 49, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern D is made in the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving The effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2600).

When the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2600), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether an on-edge has been detected (step S2601), and the second step first. On condition that the stage scenario initial effect is not executed (NO in step S2602), the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2603).

On the other hand, when the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2603), it is determined whether or not the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2604). Similarly, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2601), or when the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2602), the long press operation acceptance valid period It is determined whether (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2604).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2604), the second-stage effect control unit 76 counts the on-off edge on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c. Is a first predetermined number (step S2605). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more based on the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off edge on signal counter in the RAM 33c has reached the first predetermined number, whereby the player has operated the operation button 6. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is not the first predetermined number (NO in step S2605), the second stage effect control unit 76, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the count number of the counter is the second predetermined number (step S2606). The “second predetermined number” in step S2606 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2605.

  When the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is the second predetermined number (YES in step S2606), the second stage effect control unit 76 adds the second predetermined number to the long press time counter (step S2607). ), It is determined whether or not the count value of the long press time counter is greater than or equal to a specific number (step S2608). The “specific number” in step S2608 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2605 and larger than the “second predetermined number” in step S2606.

When the count value of the long press time counter is less than the specific number (NO in step S2608), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed. (Step S2609). When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2609), the second stage effect control unit 76 updates the on-off edge signal number counter (step S2610). YES), it is determined whether or not the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is “0” (YES in step S2611). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter has been cleared by detecting the off edge.

  When the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is not “0” (NO in step S2611), that is, when the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is updated, but the count number is not cleared. (NO in step S2611), “1” is added to the count value of the long press time counter (step S2612). That is, after the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter reaches the second predetermined number, the long press operation is performed until the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is cleared (until the off edge is detected). On condition that the acceptance valid period has not elapsed (NO in step S2609), the long press time counter is incremented by "1" every time the operation signal is sampled.

  The second stage effect control unit 76, when the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is not the second predetermined number (NO in step S2606), or when the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is cleared ( In step S2611, the process returns to step S2601 in FIG. 49, where the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is determined to be the first predetermined number (YES in step S2605), and the long press time counter is greater than or equal to the specific number. Step S2601 described above with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 until it is determined that there is (YES in step S2608) or until it is determined that the long press operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S2609 or 2613). To S2611 are repeated.

Then, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is the first predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2605), or If the count value of the long press time counter is equal to or greater than the specific number (YES in step S2608), the second stage is the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S2209), and when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum progress width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

In this way, by adding all the operation times that are longer than the specific time and processing the same as when the long press operation is performed when the added value of the operation time is the second predetermined time or longer, the long press operation Even if the operation button 6 is repeatedly pressed during the acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) or the start of the operation on the operation button 6 is delayed, the operation button 6 continues for a predetermined time or more. An effect equivalent to the case of performing a long press operation by the operation is executed. As a result, even if a player who has insufficient knowledge of the gaming method performs an operation other than the long press operation during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the gaming machine 1 that can be fully enjoyed is provided. Can be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49 or FIG. 59, the second stage effect control unit 76 has operated the operation button 6 during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), but the operation is not a long press operation. If this is the case (YES in step S2609 or NO in step S2613), second stage effect control unit 76 proceeds the least as the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211) as shown in FIG. A width is determined (step S2212), and a second stage scenario effect execution process is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the operation button 6 is not operated in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2613), FIG. As shown, the second-stage scenario presentation progress process is terminated without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second-stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage advanced in the first stage).

  Further, the second stage effect control unit 76 ends the first scenario progress effect control process by executing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after the second stage scenario effect progress process is ended.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the second-stage scenario effect progress process based on the first scenario effect pattern E in the first scenario progress effect control process.

In the first scenario effect pattern E, the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is added with all the operation times not less than the specific time not corresponding to the long press operation. The operation time less than the specific time is multiplied by a predetermined amount and then added as the operation time, and is processed in the same manner as when a long press operation is performed when the added value of the operation time is equal to or longer than the second predetermined time. .

As shown in FIG. 51, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern D is made in the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving The effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2700).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2700), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether an on-edge has been detected (step S2701), and the second step first. On condition that the stage scenario initial presentation is not executed (NO in step S2702), the second stage scenario initial presentation is executed (step S2703).

On the other hand, when the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2703), it is determined whether or not the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2704). Similarly, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2701), or the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2702), the long press operation acceptance valid period It is determined whether or not (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2704).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2704), the second-stage effect control unit 76 counts the on-off edge on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c. Is a first predetermined number (step S2705). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more based on the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off edge on signal counter in the RAM 33c has reached the first predetermined number, whereby the player has operated the operation button 6. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is not the first predetermined number (NO in step S2705), the second stage effect control unit 76, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the count number of the counter is the second predetermined number (step S2706). The “second predetermined number” in step S2706 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2705 of FIG.

  When the count number of the on-off edge ON signal number counter is the second predetermined number (YES in step S2706), the second stage effect control unit 76 adds the second predetermined number to the long press time counter (step S2707). ), It is determined whether or not the count value of the long press time counter is greater than or equal to a specific number (step S2708). The “specific number” in step S2708 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2705 of FIG. 51 and larger than the “second predetermined number” in step S2706.

When the count value of the long press time counter is less than the specific number (NO in step S2708), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed. (Step S2709). When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2709), the second stage effect control unit 76 updates the on-off edge signal number counter (step S2710). YES), it is determined whether or not the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is “0” (step S2711). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter has been cleared by detecting the off edge.

  When the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is not “0” (NO in step S2711), that is, when the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is updated, but the count number is not cleared. Then, “1” is added to the count number of the long press time counter (step S2712). That is, after the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter reaches the second predetermined number, the long press operation is performed until the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is cleared (until the off edge is detected). On condition that the acceptance valid period has not elapsed (NO in step S2709), the long press time counter is incremented by "1" every time the operation signal is sampled.

  In addition, when the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is not the second predetermined number (NO in step S2706), the second stage effect control unit 76 has the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter “0”. Whether or not (step S2713). When the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is “0” (YES in step S2713), the value obtained by multiplying the previously updated on-off edge signal number counter count by a predetermined number (× α) is pressed long. Add to the count of the signal counter. That is, if the count number of the signal counter between on-off edges is not the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number and the continuous operation time is short, the continuous operation time is multiplied by a predetermined time and added as a long press time.

  Then, when the addition of the numerical value obtained by multiplying the previous ON signal number by a predetermined value to the long press time counter in step S2714 is completed, the second stage effect control unit 76 sets the count number of the ON / OFF edge signal number counter in step S2713. If it is determined that it is not “0” (determined that the operation on the operation button 6 is continued although it is not a continuous operation to be added to the long press time counter) (NO in step S2713), or step S2711 Is determined that the count number of the signal counter between on and off edges is “0” (added to the long press time counter, but it is determined that the continuation operation has ended) (YES in step S2711). , The process returns to step S2701 in FIG.

  Hereinafter, when the count number of the on-off edge signal number counter is determined to be the first predetermined number (YES in step S2705) and the count value of the long press time counter is equal to or greater than the specific number (YES in step S2708), Alternatively, until it is determined that the long press operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S2704 or 2709), steps S2701 to S2714 described above with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52 are repeated.

Then, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is the first predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2705), or If the count value of the long press time counter is equal to or greater than the specific number (YES in step S2708), the second stage is the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S2209), and when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum progress width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

In this way, all the operation times that exceed the specified time are added together, and the operation times that are less than the specified time are added by a predetermined multiplication. By performing the same processing as when the operation was performed, the operation button 6 was repeatedly pressed during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), or the start of the operation on the operation button 6 was delayed. Even in this case, an effect equivalent to the case where a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by a continuous operation for a predetermined time or longer is executed. As a result, even if a player who has insufficient knowledge of the gaming method performs an operation other than the long press operation during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the gaming machine 1 that can be fully enjoyed is provided. Can be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs an operation on the operation button 6 in the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), but the operation is not a long-press operation (step When the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (NO in step S2211), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the minimum progress width as the progress stage (step S2212). Then, a second stage scenario effect execution process is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the operation button 6 is not operated during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2715), FIG. As shown, the second-stage scenario presentation progress process is terminated without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second-stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage advanced in the first stage).

  Further, the second stage effect control unit 76 ends the first scenario progress effect control process by executing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after the second stage scenario effect progress process is ended.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second-stage scenario effect progress process based on the first scenario effect pattern F in the first scenario progress effect control process.

The first scenario effect pattern F is equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed when the elapsed time after the continuous press operation is performed after the start of the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) and the elapsed time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Are to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 53, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern F is the timing T3 ₁ has elapsed, Long press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving The effective period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2800).

When the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is started (YES in step S2800), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not an on-edge is detected (step S2801), and the second step first. On condition that the stage scenario initial effect is not executed (NO in step S2802), the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2803).

When the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2803), it is determined whether or not the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2804). Similarly, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2801), or when the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2802), the long press operation acceptance valid period It is determined whether (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (step S2804).

When the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2804), the second-stage effect control unit 76 counts the on-off edge on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c. Is a predetermined number or not (step S2805). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is a predetermined time or more based on the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the on-off-edge on-signal counter in the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, so that when the player has operated the operation button 6, It can be determined whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

When it is determined that the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2805), the second stage effect control unit 76 accumulates the on-edge during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4). It is determined whether or not the count number of the number counter is a predetermined number, that is, whether or not the continuous hitting operation has been performed (step S2806). The “predetermined number” in this case may be arbitrarily selected from an integer of “2” or more.

When the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2806), the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the time counter ( In step S2807, it is determined whether or not the count number of the time counter is a predetermined number (step S2809). On the other hand, if the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2806), it is determined whether or not the count number of the time counter is a predetermined number (step S2809).

If the count number of the time counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2809), is the second stage effect control unit 76 determined that the on-off edge ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2805)? Or, until it is determined that the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) has elapsed (YES in step S2804), steps S2801 to S2809 described above are repeated.

Then, the second stage effect control unit 76, when the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is a predetermined number in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) (YES in step S2805), or the time counter If the count number is a predetermined number (YES in step S2809), the second stage is determined as the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208) as shown in FIG. In step S2209, when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum progress width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

As described above, the operation button 6 is continued even when the long press operation is performed when the elapsed time after the continuous press operation in the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) is a predetermined time or longer. By performing processing equivalent to the long press operation in which the operation time is the predetermined time, the continuous push operation is performed on the operation button 6 during the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), or the operation of the operation button 6 is performed. Even if the start is delayed, the same effect as that in the case where a long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by a continuous operation for a predetermined time or longer is executed. As a result, even if a player who has insufficient knowledge of the gaming method performs an operation other than the long press operation during the long press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), the gaming machine 1 that can be fully enjoyed is provided. Can be provided.

The second stage effect control unit 76 performs an operation on the operation button 6 in the long-press operation acceptance valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4), but the operation is not a long-press operation (NO in step S2810). As shown in 45, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the minimum progress width as the progress stage (step S2212), and executes the second stage scenario effect. Processing is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, when the operation button 6 is not operated in the long press operation reception valid period (T3 _{1 to} T4) as shown in FIG. 53 (YES in step S2810), the determination of the progress stage and the second step are performed as shown in FIG. The second-stage scenario presentation progress process is terminated without performing the two-stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage advanced in the first stage).

  Further, the second stage effect control unit 76 ends the first scenario progress effect control process by executing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after the second stage scenario effect progress process is ended.

<Scenario progress effect based on second scenario effect pattern 782>
Next, the second scenario effect pattern 782 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the second scenario effect pattern 782 includes the second scenario effect pattern A executed on the time of July 14, 2014 from 0:00 to July 20, 2014, 24:00, and July 21, 2014. There are two types of second scenario effect pattern B executed at the time of day 0: 00 to July 26, 2014, 24:00. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the timing of the second scenario effect pattern 782 defined in advance for the second scenario effect patterns A and B. When the second scenario effect pattern A or B is selected by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 has a first stage effect control unit 75, an suggestion effect control unit 74, and a second stage effect control unit 76. Are operated in this order, and the first stage effect 200, the suggestion effect 203, and the second stage effect 204 defined as the second scenario effect pattern 782 are respectively executed at predetermined timings.

  When the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 is started at the timing T0, the first stage effect control unit 75 first executes the first stage effect 200 within the first stage effect period (T0 to T2). To work.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 starts the title display 201 corresponding to the second scenario effect pattern 782 at the timing T0 and continues the title display 201 for the title display period (T0 to T1). The first stage effect control unit 75 has reached the timing T1 which is the start timing of the first stage scenario progress effect period (T1 to T2) after the title display period (T0 to T1) has elapsed, that is, the title display period (T0 to T0). If it is determined that T1) has ended, then the first stage scenario progress effect 202 is started.

When the first-stage scenario progress effect 202 is started at the timing T1, the first-stage effect control unit 75 displays a single-stroke operation guide image 82b (an image imitating the effect button, an indicator of the operation effective time). The player is prompted to perform a single-stroke operation of the operation button 6, and during the subsequent single-stroke operation acceptance validity period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ), the player accepts a single-stroke operation on the operation button 6 and receives a single-stroke operation acceptance validity period (T1). _{0 to} T1 ₄ ), if it is determined that there has been a single stroke pressing operation by the player, after this determination, the scenario progress based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 up to a different first stage depending on the timing at which the single stroke pressing operation is received A first stage scenario progress effect 202 is executed to advance the effect. This first stage is a stage that has advanced to the final stage from the initial stage and has not yet reached the final stage. Here, the determination method of the presence or absence of the single stroke pressing operation by the first stage presentation control unit 75 in this case is the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (T1) in the first stage presentation period (T0 to T2) of the first scenario presentation pattern 781. _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), which is the same as the method for determining whether or not there is a single stroke pressing operation and a long pressing operation by the first stage effect control unit 75.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no single stroke pressing operation by the player, the first stage production control unit 75 is based on the second scenario production pattern 782 after the single stroke pushing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ) has elapsed. The scenario progress effect is advanced to a predetermined stage. When the player does not accept a single press operation, the stage in which the scenario progress effect progresses is the minimum progress width, and is a stage that is less than the first stage. That is, in the first stage scenario progress effect 202, the first stage in which the scenario progress effect progresses differs depending on the timing at which the player performs the single stroke pressing operation. If the timing for performing the single stroke pressing operation is poor, the single stroke pressing operation is performed. In some cases, the scenario progress effect may advance only at the same stage as the minimum progression width. On the other hand, if the timing for performing the single stroke pressing operation is good, the scenario progress effect may be advanced to the first stage which has progressed dramatically compared to the minimum progression width when the single stroke pressing operation is not performed. In other words, if a player performs a single stroke pressing operation at a predetermined timing within a single stroke pressing operation acceptance valid period, the scenario progress presentation greatly progresses, so the player who expects the scenario progress presentation to advance to the final stage will have the timing. Actively perform a single stroke pressing operation while waiting. In the first stage scenario progress effect 202, the effect of advancing the scenario progress effect to the first stage by accepting the single press operation as described above is performed at least once. In this embodiment, the case where it is performed twice is illustrated. Then, after starting the first stage scenario progress effect 202, at the timing T2, the first stage scenario progress effect 202 by the first stage effect control unit 75 ends.

  At timing T2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 functions to execute the suggestion effect 203 within the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 203 from the timing T2, and ends the suggestion effect 203 at the timing T3.

When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 203, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage based on the result of the special game determination. In the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782, the suggestion effect control unit 74 displays a long press operation guide image (an image imitating the effect button, an indicator of the operation effective time) and displays the operation button 6 on the player. promote the long-press operation, it accepts the operation of the operation button 6 to the operation accepting the validity period long press _(T2 0 ~T3). It suggested performance control unit 74, the operation button in a plurality of periods _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3, T2 3 ~T2 4, T2 4 ~T3 within operation accepting validity hold 6 is a long-pressing operation (an original long-pressing operation and an operation that is not an original long-pressing operation but includes at least one of a long-pressing operation). In response, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage is executed.

Here, in the ROM 33b, each period _T2 0 _{to T2} 1 in operation accepting validity period _(T2 0 to T3) in _{hold, T2 1 ~T2 2, T2 2} ~T2 3, T2 3 ~T2 4, T2 4 A plurality of types of progress patterns are prepared as a progress pattern determination table (FIGS. 62 and 63) indicating to which stage the stage that suggests the result of the special game determination is advanced when there is a long press operation at T3. Based on the result of the special game determination, it is determined in advance according to which progress pattern the suggestion stage is advanced. In this suggestion effect 203, if the player does not perform any operation on the operation button 6 within the long press operation valid reception period (T2 _{0 to} T3) (no operation), whether or not the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage. The expectation of is not suggested. Therefore, the player actively performs operations on the operation buttons 6.

  At timing T3, the second stage effect control unit 76 functions to execute the second stage effect 204 within the second stage effect period (T3 to T6). That is, the second-stage effect control unit 76 starts the second-stage scenario progress effect 205 from the timing T3, and after the second-stage scenario progress effect 205, at the timing T4, causes the final result notification effect 206 to be performed.

  As described above, the final result notification effect 206 includes the success effect 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, the failure effect 208 in which the scenario progress effect does not advance to the final stage, or the resurrection effect 210 after the failure effect 209. It is executed as an effect to be performed. The success effect 207 continues until timing T6, and ends when timing T6 is reached. On the other hand, the failure effect 208 continues until timing T6. The failure effect 209 continues until timing T5. When the revival effect 210 is performed after the failure effect 209, the revival effect 210 starts from timing T5 and continues until timing T6.

  As described above, the second scenario effect pattern 782 is an effect pattern of 90 seconds performed within the period of the timings T0 to T6. If the success effect 207 or the resurrection effect 210 is finally performed, the second scenario effect pattern 782 shifts to the special game state ST2. This is a so-called confirmed effect that is notified to the player.

FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782. When a scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 is started, a scenario effect screen as shown in FIG. 55 is displayed on the image display 12. On this scenario presentation screen, the character 82a is displayed in a state of hanging in the air and swinging in the left-right direction, and a scenario of aiming for the goal position progresses while transferring the six air swings between the start position and the goal position. . The goal position is on the right side of the screen. In the upper part of the scenario effect screen, a route map 82d displaying an aerial swing from the start position to the goal position is displayed, and a character icon 82e indicating the position of the current character 82a is displayed on the route map 82d. The Also, in the screen, when the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ) is reached, a single-push operation guide image 82b that prompts the player to make a single-push operation (an image imitating a production button, an indicator of the operation valid time) Is displayed. Further, on the scenario effect screen, a power gauge 82c whose power accumulation amount changes as the character 82a shakes in the left-right direction is displayed at a position below the route map 82d. The power gauge 82c has the minimum power accumulation amount (0%) when the character 82a is located on the rightmost side, and the maximum power accumulation amount (100%) when located on the leftmost side. That is, when the character 82a is swaying in the left-right direction, the power storage amount constantly changes within the range from 0% to 100% according to the position of the character 82a. Then, when the amount of accumulated power is large at the timing when a single press operation by the player is accepted, the character 82a jumps over the plurality of aerial swings and transfers to the next aerial swing, and the scenario progress effect progresses dramatically. On the other hand, when the amount of accumulated power is small at the timing when a single press operation by the player is accepted, the number of aerial swings over which the character 82a jumps decreases, and the progress degree of the scenario progress effect is less than when the amount of accumulated power is large. .

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing of a single stroke pressing operation within the single stroke pressing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ) and the number of moving swings of the character 82a. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the character 82a swings back and forth halfway in the left and right directions while being hung on one air swing. First, the character 82a moves on the first forward path 83a from the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 100% toward the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 0%, and then the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 100% from the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 0%. Toward the first return path 83b. The same applies to the second round-trip, and the character 82a moves the second path 83c from the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 100% toward the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 0%, and then the power accumulation amount becomes 0%. The second return path 83d is moved from the position toward the position which becomes 100%. Finally, the character 82a moves on the third outward path 83e from the position where the power accumulation amount becomes 100% toward the position where it becomes 0%. The single stroke pushing operation acceptance valid period for accepting a single stroke pushing operation by the player is a period from the start of movement of the first forward path 83a (timing T1 ₀ ) to the end of movement of the second backward path 83d (timing T1 ₄ ). . When a single stroke operation by the player is accepted within this period, the number of swings when moving to the next aerial swing is determined by the amount of accumulated power corresponding to the timing at which the single stroke operation is accepted. That is, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), when a single stroke pressing operation is accepted when the power accumulation amount is between 0% and 30%, the movement amount when the character 82a moves to the next aerial swing is “1”. The movement amount is the same as the case where the single press operation is not performed during the single press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ). When a single stroke pressing operation is accepted when the power accumulation amount is between 30% and 60%, the movement amount when the character 82a moves to the next air swing is “1” or “2”. For example, it may be determined to be “1” when the power accumulation amount is 30% to 40% and “2” when the power accumulation amount is 40% to 60%. Further, when a single stroke pressing operation is accepted when the power accumulation amount is between 60% and 90%, the movement amount when the character 82a moves to the next air swing becomes “2” or “3”. For example, it may be determined to be “2” when the power accumulation amount is 60% to 80% and “3” when it is 80% to 90%. Further, when a single stroke pressing operation is accepted when the power accumulation amount is between 90% and 100%, the movement amount when the character 82a moves to the next air swing becomes the maximum amount of “3”. As described above, in the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782, the progress degree of the scenario progress effect changes according to the timing at which the single stroke pressing operation is accepted.

Also when the character 82a accepts a one-base hit pressed while moving the first forward path 83a _(T1 0 to T1 ₁ during), a character 82a is a timing T1 ₁ that has reached the end of its first forward path 83a of the next Move to an aerial swing. Further, when the character 82a receives a single stroke operation while moving on the first return path 83b (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), or when the character 82a moves on the second outbound path 83c (T1 _{2 to} T1 ₃ ). when receiving a pressing operation, character 82a at the timing T1 ₃ that has reached the end of the second forward path 83c moves to the next trapeze. If more character 82a accepts a one-base hit pressed while moving the second backward 83d _(T1 3 ~T1 _4), character 82a is the next trapeze at the timing T1 ₅ having reached the end point of the third forward 83e And move. As described above, in the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782, the timing at which the scenario progress effect progresses to the next stage differs depending on the timing at which the single press operation is accepted. As a result, the scenario progress effect can be advanced to the next stage at an appropriate timing according to the timing at which the single stroke pressing operation is received, so that a highly interesting effect is performed. Hereinafter, the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 will be described in more detail.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating one aspect of the title display 201 and the first stage scenario progress effect 202 which are the first stage effects 200 performed by the first stage effect control unit 75. In FIG. 57, only the screen example displayed on the image display 12 is shown, but the screen displayed on the image display 12 in some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 A linked production may be performed.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 displays the title display 201 on the image display 12 at the start timing T0 of execution of the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782. In the title display 201, the player is notified of how to proceed with the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782. In the example of FIG. 57, a message “Press the button to aim for the goal!” Is displayed, and if the character 82a can finally reach the goal point by performing the button operation, a game advantageous to the player It is reported that value is added.

The first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first stage scenario progress effect 202 when the timing T1 is reached after displaying the title display 201 for a predetermined time. In the first stage scenario progress effect 202, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the image display 12 to display the initial screen 202a of the first stage effect 200. In the initial screen 202a, the scenario effect screen shown in FIG. 55 (character 82a hanging from the air swing and swinging in the left-right direction, path diagram 82d from the start position to the goal position, and the position of the character 82a on the path diagram 82d are displayed. An image including the character icon 82e to be displayed). After displaying the initial screen 202a, becomes the start timing T1 ₀ of one-base hit pressing operation accepting valid period, the first stage performance control unit 75 prompts the push one-base hit in the initial screen 202a operated one-base hit pressing operation guide image 82b (performance button And an operation time indicator) are displayed, and the player starts accepting a single press operation. By displaying such a single-stroke operation guide image 82b, the player can grasp that the button operation is effectively accepted. Even while the button operation guidance image is displayed, the amount of accumulated power continues to change constantly as the character 82a moves in the left-right direction.

When the player performs a single stroke operation within the single stroke operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ), the first stage effect control unit 75 proceeds with the scenario according to the timing at which the single stroke operation has been performed. Decide on the next stage of production. Further, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines the timing for moving the scenario progress effect to the next stage according to the timing at which the single press operation is received, and changes the initial screen 202a to the second screen 202b at the determined timing. The character 82a is made to jump out toward the next aerial swing. Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 changes the display screen of the image display device 12 from the second screen 202b to the third screen 202c, and swings in the left-right direction while the character 82a is hung on the next aerial swing. The status is displayed. On the third screen 202c, the display position of the character icon 82e advances in accordance with the position of the aerial swing to which the character 82a has jumped.

On the other hand, if the player does not perform a single stroke pressing operation within the single stroke pressing operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{0 to} T1 ₄ ), the first stage effect control unit 75 is the minimum as the next stage for proceeding with the scenario progress effect. The travel width (the number of swings = 1) is determined. Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the initial screen 202a to transition to the fourth screen 202d at the latest timing after the character 82a sways in two reciprocating half-left and right directions, and directs the character 82a to the next aerial swing. Jump out. Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 changes the display screen of the image display device 12 from the fourth screen 202d to the fifth screen 202e, and swings in the left-right direction while the character 82a is hung on the next aerial swing. The status is displayed. Also on the fifth screen 202e, the display position of the character icon 82e advances in accordance with the position of the aerial swing to which the character 82a has jumped.

  By the way, the timing at which the scenario progress effect is advanced (the timing at which the character 82a jumps to the next aerial swing) differs between when the player performs a single stroke pressing operation and when the single stroke pressing operation is not performed. There is. Therefore, the first stage effect control unit 75 advances the scenario progress effect to the next stage earlier than the timing of advancing the scenario progress effect when the single stroke press operation is not accepted when the single stroke press operation is accepted. The first stage effect control unit 75 performs the effect of causing the character 82a to move to the next stage twice in accordance with the timing at which the single stroke pressing operation by the player is received as described above. For this reason, after the character 82a has advanced to the next stage, the first stage effect control unit 75 returns to the state in which the above-described initial screen 202a is displayed when it becomes a timing at which a single press operation by the player can be accepted again. Then, the player performs a process of advancing the character 82a to the next stage in accordance with the timing of accepting the single stroke pressing operation by the player. Even if the player performs a single stroke pressing operation twice, the character 82a does not reach the goal in the first stage scenario progress effect 202.

  58, 59, and 60 are diagrams illustrating an aspect of the suggestion effect 203 performed by the suggestion effect control unit 74. 58, 59, and 60 show only screen examples displayed on the image display device 12, the image display device is used for some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display device 12. An effect linked to the screen displayed on the screen 12 may be performed.

The suggestion effect control unit 74 functions in a state where the display screen 202f in a state in which the scenario progress effect has progressed to the first stage is displayed by the first stage scenario progress effect 202 by the first stage effect control unit 75 described above. The suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 203 when the first stage scenario progress effect 202 is completed and the timing T2 is reached. In the suggestion effect 203, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the image display 12 to display an effect screen related to the suggestion effect 203. In the center of the effect screen related to the suggestion effect 203, a power gauge 84a in which power is not accumulated is displayed. MIN is written on the right end of the power gauge 84a. MAX is written on the left end of the power gauge 84a. The MIN and MAX in the power gauge 84a are partitioned at equal intervals (1/5 interval between MIN and MAX) by the four partition walls 84b. Becomes the start timing T2 ₀ of the long press operation accepted the validity period _(T2 0 ~T3), suggesting the effect control unit 74, button operation guide to encourage the long press operation of the operation button 6 to the player to the effect screen according to the suggested performance 203 An image (an image imitating an effect button, an indicator of an operation valid time, a character of long press!) Is displayed, and acceptance of a long press operation by a player is started.

The suggestion effect control unit 74 receives a long press operation by the player within the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). And the suggestion production | generation control part 74 is different from one timing and the said one timing among several timings set to the long press operation reception effective period which is one of the predetermined periods defined based on production. When the operation information indicates that the operation button 6 is operated by the player at one timing, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time at each timing. Then, for example, the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation button at each of a plurality of timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ , T3 set within the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). On the condition that a long press operation is performed on 6, a long press effect is performed in which the execution state of the specific game effect according to the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a and the display color of the power accumulation amount changes stepwise. More specifically, the suggestion effect control unit 74 is between a timing among a plurality of timings set in a predetermined period determined based on the effect and a predetermined counting timing immediately before the one timing. The operation information indicates that the operation button 6 is operated by the player in a specific period between the specific period, another timing, and a predetermined calculation timing immediately before the one timing. At some point, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time in each specific period. Then, for example, the suggestion effect control unit 74 includes the timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ , T3 and predetermined calculation timings T2 ₀ , T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ immediately before each of them. The presence or absence of a long press operation is determined in each of the specific periods (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3). And the suggestion production | presentation control part 74 is on condition of the long press operation in each specific period (T2 _0- T2 ₁ , T2 ₁ -T2 ₂ , T2 ₂ -T2 ₃ , T2 ₃ -T2 ₄ , T2 ₄ -T3). The power accumulation amount of MIN → first gauge → second gauge → third gauge → fourth gauge → MAX and power gauge 84a is increased. In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 has a long press operation in each specific period (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3) as a condition. Display color of power storage amount when reaching the first gauge, Display color of power storage amount when reaching the second gauge, Display color of power storage amount when reaching the third gauge, Power when reaching the fourth gauge The display color of the accumulation amount and the display color of the power accumulation amount at the time of reaching MAX are changed from blue → green → yellow → red → rainbow color. In this way, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs the long press operation time in each specific period (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3). Alternatively, the execution mode of the specific game effect is changed based on at least a part of the long press operation time. In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 specifies a predetermined timing immediately before the one determination timing at one of the determination timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 _4. When it is determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 during the period, a gauge progress process equivalent to that when a long press operation has been performed at the determination timing before the one determination timing may be performed. Further, when a predetermined long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 at one timing, the specific game effect is displayed in the same manner as when the long press effect is executed at another timing before the one timing. It is possible to change the execution mode.

More specifically, as shown in the example of gauge progress from (a) to (b0) in FIGS. 58, 59, and 60, the suggestion effect control unit 74 is operated during a specific period from timing T2 _{0 to} T2 _1. If the button 6 is never operated, the power storage amount of the time of the start timing T2 ₀ (MIN) without increasing the, only the updated display of the remaining time of the long press operation accepting lifetime. Further, FIG. 58, as the gauge advanced cases of in FIG. 59, and FIG. 60 (a) → (b1) , suggesting the performance control unit 74, when the timing T2 ₀ since there is an operation of the operation button 6, press and hold Power accumulation at a speed that advances by one gauge (hereinafter referred to as a non-long-pressing progress speed) between successive timings T within the operation reception valid period (a time that is 1/5 of the long-press operation reception period itself) Start increasing the amount. The power is stored without determining that a long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation that is not an original long press operation but is regarded as a long press operation) is performed on the operation button 6. When the amount reaches the immediately preceding stage 84e of the first gauge (specifically, the stage of 80% between the MIN and the first gauge), the increase in the amount of accumulated power before the immediately preceding stage 84e is limited. Further, FIGS. 58, 59, and as a gauge progress example of in FIG. 60 (a) → (b2) , suggesting the performance control unit 74, a long press operation line for the operation buttons 6 on the timing T2 ₀ after If it is determined that the Broken, the power storage amount is calculated the speed to reach the first gauge and long press traveling speed, the non-long-pressing the moving speed and the traveling speed hold power storage amount during the period from that point until the timing T2 ₁ change the rate of increase of, at the timing T2 ₁ to reach a power storage amount in the first gauge. The suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the display color of the power accumulation amount to blue when the power accumulation amount reaches the first gauge.

The suggestion effect control unit 74 performs the timing T2 as shown in the gauge progress examples in (b0) → (c00) in FIG. 58, (b1) → (c10) in FIG. 59, and (b2) → (c20) in FIG. ₁ to T2 when the operation button 6 in a specific period of ₂ are not at all operation, without increasing the power storage amount of the time of the start timing T2 _1, performs only updating the display of the remaining time of a long press operation acceptance lifetime. 58. (b0) → (c01) in FIG. 58, (b1) → (c11) in FIG. 59, and (b2) → (c21) in FIG. When the timing T2 ₁ since there is an operation of the operation button 6 to start the increase of power storage amount of the non-long press running speed. The power is stored without determining that a long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation that is not an original long press operation but is regarded as a long press operation) is performed on the operation button 6. When the amount reaches the stage 84e immediately before the second gauge (specifically, the stage of 80% between the first gauge and the second gauge), the increase in the amount of accumulated power before the stage 84e immediately before is limited. To do. 58. (b0) → (c02) in FIG. 58, (b1) → (c12) in FIG. 59, and (b2) → (c22) in FIG. If it is determined that the long press operation to the timing T2 ₁ since the operation button 6 is performed, and the power storage amount is calculated the speed to reach the second gauge length press running speed during the period from that point until the timing T2 ₂ , non-long press to change the speed of increase of the power storage amount and the traveling speed hold from the traveling speed, according to the timing T2 ₂ to reach the power storage amount in the second gauge. The suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the display color of the power accumulation amount to green when the power accumulation amount reaches the second gauge.

Here, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a specific period (timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ ) as in the example of gauge progress in (b0) → (c02) in FIG. 58 and (b1) → (c12) in FIG. When the power accumulation amount at the time when the long press operation is performed in the period does not reach the first gauge, which is the stage before the stage of reaching the long press operation for a specific period (timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ ) as a condition, the timing T2 _In the period up to ₂ , the first gauge is passed through to the second gauge. Therefore, without being determined long press operation is performed at a specific time (timing T2 0 _{to T2 1),} if the long press operation in the next specified time period (timing _T2 1 ~T2 ₂₎ is determined to have been performed The time required for the power storage amount in MIN to reach the first gauge is a long press operation in each of the specific period (timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ ) and the next specific period (timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ ). When it is determined that the power accumulated, the power accumulation amount becomes shorter than the time required to reach the first gauge from the MIN. That is, in this embodiment, for the change of presentation mode by the power storage amount of the power gauge 84a, if the long press operation at timing T2 ₂ is determined to have been performed, the timing T2 ₂ other previous timing T2 ₁ When there is an unreachable effect mode that is not executed in the step, the effect is changed to an unreached effect mode in a second time shorter than the first time when there is no unreached effect mode.

In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 is in a specific period (timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ ) as in the example of gauge progress in (b0) → (c02) in FIG. 58 and (b1) → (c12) in FIG. When the power accumulation amount at the time when the long press operation is performed does not reach the first gauge which is a stage before the stage of reaching the long press operation for the specific period as a condition, the power accumulation amount passes through the first gauge. The power storage amount is changed to blue when the power storage amount reaches the second gauge. That is, in this embodiment, for the change of presentation mode by the power storage amount of the display color of the power gauge 84a, if the long press operation at timing T2 ₂ is determined to have been performed, the timing T2 ₂ previous other when there is not reached the representation embodiment is not running at the timing T2 _1, it carries out an effect that does not change the phase of the unreached.

For similarly timing T2 ₂ later, suggesting the performance control unit 74, a specific time period (timing _T2 2 to T2 _3, a timing _T2 3 to T2 _4, a timing _T2 4 to T3) in response to long press the presence or absence of the operation of each, The power accumulation amount of the power gauge 84a is increased and the display color of the power accumulation amount is changed. The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage based on the power accumulation amount at the end of the single-stroke operation acceptance valid period and the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a.

  FIG. 61A is a diagram showing the relationship between the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a and the expectation. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing the relationship between the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a and the expected degree. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage when the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a reaches the first gauge is “low”. The degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage when the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a exceeds the first gauge and reaches the second gauge is also “low”. When the amount of power stored in the power gauge 84a exceeds the second gauge and reaches the third gauge, the expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage is “medium” which is higher than “low”. The expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage when the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a exceeds the third gauge and reaches the fourth gauge is “high”, which is higher than “medium”. Then, when the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a exceeds the fourth gauge and reaches MAX, it is determined that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage when the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a is blue is "low". The degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage when the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is green is also “low”. When the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a is yellow, the expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage is “medium”. When the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a is yellow, the expectation that the scenario progress effect will progress to the final stage is “high”. Then, when the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a becomes rainbow, it is determined that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage. Thus, in the suggestion effect 203, the degree of expectation is suggested by the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a by the player and the display color of the power accumulation amount. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a, the display color of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a is displayed on the background other than the power gauge 84a, the movable accessory 14, the frame lamp 9, and the like. You may make it change corresponding to. Thereby, the suggestion effect 203 can be performed on the entire screen of the image display 12 or the entire gaming machine 1.

The suggestion effect control unit 74 refers to the progress pattern determination table in the ROM 33b at the start timing T2 of the suggestion effect 203, and based on the result of the special game determination, the power gauge 84a according to any progress pattern in the progress pattern determination table. It is determined in advance whether to change the amount of accumulated power. The suggested effect control unit 74, the timing _T2 0 to T2 ₁ of propriety gauge progress leading to the first gauge in a specific period in the operation accepting validity period long press, the second gauge at a specific period of time _T2 1 to T2 ₂ whether gauge progress leading to the timing _T2 2 to T2 ₃ of the third possibility gauge progress leading to the gauge in a particular period, the timing _T2 3 to T2 ₄ fourth possibility gauge progress leading to the gauge in a particular period, and the timing T2 _The display screen is updated while determining whether or not the gauge progresses to MAX in a specific period from _{4 to} T3 according to this progress pattern, and the power accumulation amount at timing T3 which is the end point of the long press operation acceptance valid period and its The degree of expectation is suggested by the display color of the power storage amount.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a progress pattern determination table that is referred to when the result of the special game determination is “with transition to special game state”. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a progress pattern determination table that is referred to when the result of the special game determination is “no transition to the special game state”.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the progress pattern determination table in the case where the result of the special game determination is “with transition to the special game state”, the power accumulation amount at timing T3, which is the end point of the long press operation reception valid period , The power accumulated at the timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period until the fourth gauge, and the power at the timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period. Those that stop the accumulated amount up to the third gauge, those that stop the power accumulated amount at the timing T3 that is the end point of the long press operation acceptance valid period, and those that stop the long press operation acceptance valid period The power storage amount at the timing T3 is included up to the first gauge. In FIG. 62, for the sake of simplicity, the number of progress patterns that cause the power accumulation amount at timing T3, which is the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period, to reach MAX is only 10 (progress patterns 101 to 110). It is preferable to record a larger number of progress patterns in the progress pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the progress pattern determination table in the case where the result of the special game determination is “no transition to the special game state”, the power accumulation amount at timing T3, which is the end point of the long press operation reception valid period That stop at the fourth gauge, one that stops the power accumulation amount at the timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period, and timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period The power storage amount is stopped up to the second gauge, and the power storage amount at the timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period is stopped up to the first gauge. In the progress pattern determination table when the result of the special game determination is “no transition to the special game state”, the power accumulation amount at the timing T3, which is the end point of the long press operation reception valid period, reaches MAX. Not included.

For example, if the advance pattern 101 of the determination table in FIG. 62 is selected in the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, suggesting the performance control unit 74, the timing _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3 , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3, the gauge progress in each specific period is as follows. First, if the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the first gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the second gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the third gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the long press operation has been performed in the specific period of timing T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the fourth gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{4 to} T3, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach MAX. When this progress pattern 101 is selected, the player is notified that the power accumulation amount reaches MAX at the timing T3, which is the end point of the long press operation acceptance valid period, and the scenario progress effect is at the final stage.

Further, if the advance pattern 105 of the determination table in FIG. 62 is selected in the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, suggesting the performance control unit 74, the timing _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3 , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3, the gauge progress in each specific period is as follows. First, if the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the first gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the second gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the third gauge. The suggestion effect control unit 74 limits the progress of the gauge ahead of the stage at the timing T2 ₃ in the specific period from the timing T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ regardless of whether or not the long press operation is performed. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{4 to} T3, the suggestion effect control unit 74 releases the restriction on the gauge progress at the timing T2 ₃ and passes the power accumulation amount through the fourth gauge. To reach MAX at once. When this progress pattern 105 is selected, as in the case where the progress pattern 101 is selected, the power accumulation amount reaches MAX at the timing T3, which is the end point of the long press operation acceptance valid period, and the scenario progress effect is finally reached. The player is informed of the stage.

Further, if the advance pattern 301 of the determination table of the determination table or Figure 63 of FIG. 62 is selected in the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, a timing _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3, The gauge progress in each specific period of T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ and T2 _{4 to} T3 is as follows. First, if the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the first gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that a long press operation has been performed during a specific period of timing T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the second gauge. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the long press operation has been performed during the period of the timings T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the third gauge. It suggested performance control unit 74, the period of time T2 ₃ to T2 _4, with or without the long press operation, restricting the gauge progression to ahead stage of the point of timing T2 _3. The suggestion effect control unit 74 limits the progress of the gauge ahead of the stage at the time point of the timing T2 ₃ even during the period of the timings T2 _{4 to} T3, regardless of whether or not the long press operation is performed. When this progress pattern 105 is selected, the power accumulation amount does not reach MAX at timing T3, which is the end point of the long press operation acceptance valid period, and the player is not notified that the scenario progress effect is at the final stage.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the second stage effect 204 performed by the second stage effect control unit 76. 64 shows only a screen example displayed on the image display device 12, but a screen displayed on the image display device 12 in some or all of the constituent elements of the rendering device 36 other than the image display device 12. A linked production may be performed.

  Here, the second stage effect 204 includes a second stage scenario progress effect 205 and a final result notification effect 206 indicating the final result of the scenario progress effect performed after the effect indicating the final result (see FIG. 54). The final result notification effect 206 includes three aspects: a success effect 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, a failure effect 208 that does not progress to the final stage, and an effect that performs the resurrection effect 210 after the failure effect 209. .

  In the second stage effect 204, when the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 205 after the suggestion effect 203 described above, as shown in FIG. The initial screen 204a of the scenario progress effect 205 is displayed. On this initial screen 204a, a preparation image for progressing from the first stage to the final stage that has progressed in the first stage scenario progress effect 202 is displayed. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 makes a transition from the initial screen 204a to the first screen 204b. On the first screen 204b, the character 82a jumps out toward the goal point, a different character appears from the goal point, and a screen for catching the character 82a in the air is displayed.

  Thereafter, at timing T5, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts either the success effect 207 or the failure effect 208 as the final result notification effect 206. When performing the success effect 207, the second stage effect control unit 76 changes the display screen of the image display 12 from the first screen 204b of the second stage scenario progress effect 205 to the initial screen 205a of the success effect 207. 82a displays an image that has been successfully caught in the air, and then displays a first screen 205b indicating that the goal point has been reached. This success effect 207 is executed over a period from timing T4 to timing T6. When the success effect 207 is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 subsequently shifts to the special gaming state ST2.

  This failure effect includes a failure effect 208 that is executed over time from timing T4 to timing T6, and a failure effect 209 that is executed until timing T5 before timing T4 reaches timing T6 and switches to the restoration effect 210. is there. As shown in FIG. 64, when performing the failure effect 208 of the former mode, the second stage effect control unit 76 changes the display screen of the image display 12 from the first screen 204 b of the second stage effect 204 to the failure effect 207. The initial screen 206a is displayed, an image of the character 82a falling without being caught in the air is displayed, and then the first screen 206b indicating failure to reach the goal point is displayed. In this case, except for the case where the revival effect 210 is performed after the failure effect 209, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 remains the same as before that.

  On the other hand, when performing the failure effect 209 of the latter aspect, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes the failure effect 209 similar to the former aspect until the timing T5, and between the timing T5 and the timing T6. The rebirth effect 210 is performed. In the revival effect 210, the image display 12 displays a screen (for example, a screen displaying the characters “revival! Success” shown on the lowermost screen 110b in FIG. 28B) indicating that the failure has succeeded. To display. When the revival effect 210 is performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2 as in the case where the scenario progress effect reaches the final stage.

  Next, a processing procedure in the effect control board 33 when a scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A or B is performed will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the second scenario progress effect pattern control process when a scenario progress effect is performed based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 on the effect control board 33. When this process is started and the timing T1 for starting the first stage scenario effect 202 is reached (YES in step S3100), the effect control board 33 causes the first stage effect control unit 75 to function and the first stage effect control unit 75. The first stage effect control process is started (step S3101). Thereafter, at the start timing T2 of the suggestion effect 203 (YES in step S3102), the effect control board 33 causes the suggestion effect control unit 74 to function and starts the suggestion effect 203 by the suggestion effect control unit 74 (step S3103). Thereafter, at the start timing T3 of the second stage effect 204 (YES in Step S3104), the effect control board 33 causes the second stage effect control unit 76 to function, and the second stage effect 204 by the second stage effect control unit 76. Is started (step S3105). When the process by the second stage effect control unit 76 ends, the second scenario effect pattern control process ends.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the first stage effect control process (step S3101 in FIG. 65) when the scenario effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A or the second scenario effect pattern B is performed. When starting this process, the first stage effect control unit 75 starts executing the first stage effect 200 defined in the second scenario effect pattern 782 (step S3110). And the 1st step production | generation control part 75 starts a title screen display (step S3111), when predetermined time passes (it is YES at S3112), will perform a 1st step scenario production progress process (step S3113), and will be 1st step. When the scenario presentation progress process is completed, the process returns.

  67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the detailed processing procedure of the first stage scenario effect progress process (step S3113 in FIG. 66). When this process is started, the first stage effect control unit 75 waits until the start of the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (NO in step S3121), and when the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period is reached (YES in step S3121), Acceptance of a single press operation is started (step S3122). Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 detects the presence or absence of a single stroke pressing operation by determining whether or not an on-edge has been detected (step S3123), and when no single stroke pressing operation is detected (NO in step S3123). ), It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3124). This predetermined time is a period in which the first single press operation of two times is received. The presence / absence of the single press operation can be determined by referring to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b.

  When the first stage production control unit 75 detects a single stroke operation by the player within the single stroke push operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S3123), the first stage production control unit 75 performs the scenario progress presentation based on the timing when the single stroke operation is performed by the player. The degree of progress (first stage) for proceeding to the next stage is determined (step S3125), and scenario effect execution processing for advancing the scenario effect based on the determined degree of progress is performed (step S3126). Subsequently, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the process of advancing the scenario progress effect is performed earlier than the case where the single press operation is not performed (step S3127), and the scenario effect execution process is performed earlier. If so (YES in step S3127), the process waits until a predetermined time elapses (step S3128). By this standby, an image is displayed in which the character 82a moves in the left-right direction for one reciprocation or two reciprocations in the destination. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3128), the process proceeds to step S3131. If the process of advancing the scenario progress effect is not performed earlier than the case where the single stroke pressing operation is not performed (NO in step S3127), the process of step S3128 is skipped.

  On the other hand, if a single stroke pressing operation by the player is not detected within the single stroke pressing operation reception valid period (NO in step S3123), and a predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3124), the first stage effect control The unit 75 determines the step of advancing the scenario progress effect as the minimum progress width because the player has not performed a single stroke pressing operation (step S3129). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a scenario effect execution process for advancing the scenario effect with the minimum progress width (step S3130).

  Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 starts accepting a single stroke pressing operation by the player (step S3131). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not a single stroke pressing operation by the player has been detected by determining whether or not an on-edge has been detected (step S3132), and when no single stroke pressing operation has been detected. (NO in step S3132), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3133). This predetermined time is a period during which the second single press operation is received.

  If a single press operation by the player is detected within the single press operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S3132), the first stage effect control unit 75 performs the scenario progress effect based on the timing at which the single press operation is performed by the player. The degree of progress (first stage) for proceeding to the next stage is determined (step S3134), and scenario effect execution processing for advancing the scenario effect based on the determined degree of progress is performed (step S3135). Subsequently, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the process of advancing the scenario progress effect is performed earlier than the case where the single stroke pressing operation is not performed (step S3136), and the scenario effect execution process is performed earlier. If so (YES in step S3136), the process waits until a predetermined time elapses (step S3137). By this standby, an image is displayed in which the character 82a moves in the left-right direction for one reciprocation or two reciprocations in the destination. When the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3137), the first-stage scenario effect progress process ends. If the process of advancing the scenario progress effect is not performed earlier than the case where the single stroke pressing operation is not performed (NO in step S3136), the process of step S3137 is skipped and the first-stage scenario effect progress process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if a single stroke pressing operation by the player is not detected within the single stroke pressing operation acceptance valid period (NO in step S3132), and a predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3133), the first stage effect control The unit 75 determines the step of advancing the scenario effect as a minimum progression width because the player has not performed a single stroke pressing operation (step S3138). And the 1st step production | generation control part 75 performs the scenario production | presentation execution process which advances a scenario production with the minimum progress width (step S3139). Then, the first stage scenario effect progress process is terminated.

  In the first-stage effect control process (step S3101) as described above, when the first-stage effect control unit 75 starts the first-stage scenario progress effect 202, the character 82a is left and right according to the result of the special game determination. The degree of difficulty when the player performs a single stroke pressing operation may be changed in accordance with the timing at which the power accumulation amount of the power gauge 82c is maximized (100%) by changing the speed of shaking in the direction. For example, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the first stage effect control unit 75 does not shift the speed when the character 82a moves in the left-right direction to the special game state ST2. Make it slower than it is. Further, when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2, the first stage effect control unit 75 is to shift the speed when the character 82a swings in the left-right direction to the special game state ST2. Faster than. As a result, the difficulty level that matches the predetermined timing when the player performs a single stroke pressing operation changes depending on whether or not the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2. The degree of progress of the scenario progress effect can be adjusted according to the determination result.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion effect control process (step S3103 in FIG. 65). When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts this process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 first confirms the result of the special game determination performed by the special game determination unit 52 (step S3141). The suggestion effect control unit 74 determines a progress pattern to be referred to in the next suggestion effect progress process based on the special game determination result (step S3142).

  More specifically, in this step S3142, if the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 stores a plurality of information stored in the determination table shown in FIG. One of the progression patterns is selected as a reference target during the suggestion effect progression process. Further, when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2, one of a plurality of progress patterns stored in the determination table shown in FIG. 63 is selected as a reference target in the suggestion effect progress process. To do.

  Next, the suggestion effect control unit 74 executes the suggestion effect progress process (step S3143) and returns. This suggestion effect progress process has different processing contents when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A is performed and when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern B is performed.

  70 and 71 are flowcharts showing an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion effect progress process (step S3143 in FIG. 69) when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A is performed. In this process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a specific period between one timing and a predetermined counting timing immediately before the one timing, a predetermined timing immediately before another one timing and the other one timing. When the operation information indicates that the operation button 6 is operated by the player in a specific period between the calculation timings, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time in each specific period. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the execution mode of the specific game based on the long press operation time during which the operation button 6 is pressed and held by the player in each specific period. Details will be described below. When the suggestion effect control process 74 starts the suggestion effect progress process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 waits until the long press operation acceptance valid period is started (NO in step S3150), and when the long press operation acceptance valid period is started (in step S3150). YES), it is confirmed whether or not the gauge progress flag is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If it is stored, the gauge progress flag in the gauge progress flag area is cleared (step S3151). Here, the gauge progress flag is a flag indicating a state of gauge progress in the power gauge 82c. There are two types of gauge progress flags, “1” and “2”. The gauge progress flag “1” is a state in which the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c is increased at a non-long-pressing progress speed (speed that advances by one gauge between successive timings within the long-pressing operation effective period). Indicates that there is. The gauge progress flag “2” indicates that the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c is increased by a long press and progressing speed (speed to reach the gauge corresponding to that timing by the next timing). Show. The gauge progress flag “no set” indicates that the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c is stopped without increasing.

  After execution of step S3151, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the on-off edge on signal number counter in the first area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d and the second signal area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d. The cumulative ON signal number counter is reset (S3152). As described above, the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter and the cumulative ON signal number counter are updated by the operation control unit 66 every 2 milliseconds based on the operation signal SGN. As described above, the suggestion effect control unit 74 indicates that the operation button 6 is operated, the operation button 6 is operated by the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter and the cumulative ON signal number counter that are updated based on the operation signal SGN. It can be determined that is not operated and that the operation button 6 is continuously operated.

After step S3152, suggesting the performance control unit 74 in accordance with progression pattern determined in step S3142, it sets the arrival step of the gauge progression in a specific time period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ (step S3153). To be more specific, in step S3142 of FIG. 69, if the advance pattern 101 in the determination table in FIG. 62 has been selected, the arrival phase of a particular period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ in accordance with the progress pattern Set to “1st gauge”. Further, for example, in step S3142 of FIG. 69, if the advance pattern 205 in the determination table in FIG. 62 has been selected, "No progress reaching the stage of a particular period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ in accordance with the progress pattern To "".

  The suggestion effect control unit 74 starts accepting a long press operation by the player (step S3154). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the operation button 6 is in an operation state (step S3155). Specifically, the suggestion effect control unit 74 refers to the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c of the RAM 33c, and “1” is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the operation state, it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state when “0” is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. . As described above, “1” is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c after the on-edge of the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6 is detected until the off-edge is detected. Then, “0” is written between the time when the off edge is detected and the time when the on edge is detected.

  If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines in step S3155 that the operation button 6 is in the operation state (YES in step S3155), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3156. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in a non-operation state (NO in step S3155), the process proceeds to step S3163.

In step S3156, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the setting stage of the current relevant period in the long-press operation acceptance valid period is “no progress”. For example, a certain period of the current relevant period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 _1, if the "first gauge" has been set in step S3153, the determination result of this step is "NO", "no progress "Is set, the determination result in this step is" YES ". If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the current setting period of the relevant period is not “no progress” (NO in step S3156), the suggestion control unit 74 proceeds to step S3157. If it is determined that the current setting period of the relevant period is “no progress” (YES in step S3156), the process advances to step S3163.

  In step S3157, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether or not the gauge progress flag “no set” is in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If the gauge progress flag is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3157), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3158. If either of the gauge progress flags “1” and “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3157), the process proceeds to step S3160.

  In step S3158, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a command instructing the start of gauge progress at the non-long-pressing progress speed in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c. Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “1” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3159). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3158 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the progress of the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the screen of the image display 12 is stopped. When receiving this command, the image control board 34 starts increasing the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c at the non-long-pressing progress speed. After execution of step S3159, the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3169.

  In step S3160, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether or not the gauge progress flag “1” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If the gauge progress flag “1” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3160), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3161. If the gauge progress flag “1” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3160), the process proceeds to step S3169.

  In step S3161, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter in the first storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in this step S3161 is the half of the specific period within the long press operation reception valid period (1/10 time of the long press operation reception valid period itself) of the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6. A value obtained by dividing the sampling interval by 2 milliseconds is desirable. When it is determined that the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (NO in S3161), the suggestion effect control unit 74 has a length that allows the operation button 6 to be determined to be a long press operation. It is determined that it has not reached, and the process proceeds to step S3162. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (YES in S3161), the continuous operation time of the operation button 6 has reached a length that can be determined as a long press. And the process proceeds to step S3167.

  In step S3162, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the cumulative ON signal number counter in the second storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in this step S3162 is also the sampling of the operation signal SGN of the operation button 6 for a half time of the specific period within the long press operation acceptance valid period (1/10 of the long press operation acceptance valid period itself). A value obtained by dividing the interval by 2 milliseconds is desirable. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the cumulative ON signal number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (NO in S3162), the total duration of each continuous operation time of the plurality of operations after the start point of the current specific period. Is determined not to have reached a length that can be determined to be a long press operation, and the flow proceeds to step S3163. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the cumulative ON signal number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (YES in S3162), the total of the continuous operation time of each of a plurality of operations after the start point of the current specific period. It is determined that the time has reached a length that can be determined to be a long press operation, and the flow proceeds to step S3167.

  In step S3163, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a has reached the previous stage 84e. Here, as described above, a long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation that is not an original long press operation but is regarded as a long press operation) is performed on the operation button 6. When the power storage amount reaches the immediately preceding stage 84e without determining that the power storage amount has not been determined, an increase in the power storage amount beyond the immediately preceding stage 84e is limited as long as there is no long press operation. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines in step S3163 that the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the previous stage 84e (YES in step S3163), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3164.

  In step S3164, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3164), the suggestion effect control unit 74 instructs to limit the increase in the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a. The command is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3165). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3166). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3165 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the image display device 12 is progressing at a non-long-pressing progress speed. When the image control board 34 receives this command, the image control board 34 stops increasing the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c. The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3169 after executing step S3166. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3164), step S3165 and step S3166 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3169.

In step S3167, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a for the specific period at the end timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ , or T3 of the current specific period. The speed to reach the gauge at the stage is set as the long press progress speed, and a command for instructing an increase in the amount of accumulated power at the long press progress speed is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3167). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “2” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3168). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S 3168 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the amount of power stored in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the image display 12 is progressing at a non-long-pressing progress speed, or is stopped when the previous stage 84e is reached. When receiving this command, the image control board 34 starts to increase the amount of accumulated power at the long press advance speed indicated by the command. Then, the image control board 34 increases the power accumulation amount to the gauge at the stage set for the specific period in the power gauge 82c, and displays the display color of the power accumulation amount when the gauge corresponding to the gauge is reached. Change to the color corresponding to the specific period. The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3169 after executing step S3168.

In step S3169, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the timing T2 ₁ , the timing T2 ₂ , the timing T2 ₃ , or the timing T2 ₄ has been reached. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the timing T2 ₁ , the timing T2 ₂ , the timing T2 ₃ , the timing T2 ₄ , or the timing T3 has come (YES in step S3169), the process proceeds to step S3170. When it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , the timing T2 ₂ , the timing T2 ₃ , the timing T2 ₄ , or the timing T3 is not reached (NO in step S3169), the process proceeds to step S3174.

  In step S3170, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the gauge progress flag “2” is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3170), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3171. In step S3171, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area and proceeds to step S3172. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is not stored in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3170), step S3171 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S3172.

In step S3172, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the on-off edge on signal number counter in the first storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d and the cumulative on in the second storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d. Reset the signal counter. Here, as described above, the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter is a switch between the time when the ON edge of the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6 is detected and the time when the OFF edge is detected within the long press operation effective period. The number of ON signal samplings is counted, and is used to obtain information associated with the continuous operation time of the operation button 6. The cumulative ON signal number counter counts the number of sampling of the switch-on signal of the operation signal SGN of the operation button 6 (the number of signals in the switch-on state) within the long-press operation effective period. It is used to obtain information related to the time when the body 6a is operated. In this embodiment, _every time the determination timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 arrives (YES in step S3169), the process proceeds to step S3172, and the on-off edge on-signal counter and the cumulative on-signal count By resetting the counter, an operation signal for each specific period from timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₁ to timing T2 ₂ , T2 ₂ to timing T2 ₃ , T2 ₃ to timing T2 ₄ , or T2 ₄ to timing T3 The SGN is processed in association with the operation time in each specific period. Then, as will be described later, the execution mode of the specific game effect can be changed based on the long press operation time (including the operation time and the operation time by adding a plurality of operation times) in each specific period.

After execution of step S3172, the suggestion effect control unit 74 follows the progress pattern determined in step S3142, and the gauge in a specific period starting from the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ determined to have arrived in step S3169. A progress reaching stage is set (step S3173). The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3174 after executing step S3173. If it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has not been reached (NO in step S3169), the suggestion effect control unit 74 skips steps S3171, S3172, and S3173 and proceeds to step S3174.

In step S3174, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the end timing T3 of the long press operation reception valid period has been reached. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that it has not reached the end timing T3 of the long-press operation acceptance valid period (NO in step S3174), it returns to step S3155 and repeats the subsequent processing. Also, if it is determined that the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has been reached (YES in step S3174), the suggestion effect progress process is terminated and the process returns. In such a scenario progress effect suggestion effect progress process based on the second scenario effect pattern A, immediately before the one determination timing at one of the determination timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ and T2 _4. If it is determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 during a specific period between the predetermined calculation timing and the gauge equivalent to the case where the long press operation has been performed at the determination timing before the one determination timing Progression processing may be performed. That is, the execution mode of the specific game effect may be changed as in the case where the long press effect is executed at the previous timing.

The above suggestion effect progress process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Figure 72 is a specific period from the traveling patterns 102 (timing T2 ₀ the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T2 0 to T3) to the preceding progression pattern determination process (step S3142) until the timing T2 ₁ is "first gauge", the timing T2 certain period from ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ is "second gauge", the specific periods specified period from the timing T2 ₂ until the timing T2 ₃ from "third gauge", the timing T2 ₃ to the timing T2 ₄ is "4 gauge ", a particular period from the timing T2 ₄ to the time T3 is the operation of the operation buttons 6 of the long press operation accepting validity period (T2 0 _{to T3)} in the case of traveling pattern for each proceed to" MAX ") is selected It is a figure which shows an example of the change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production | generation 203 according to this.

In the example of FIG. 72, the operation button 6 is operated four times during the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). In the first operation of four times, the operated operation button 6 within a certain period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 _1, within a specified time period from the timing T2 ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ operation state of the operation button 6 It has been released. In the second operation, the operation button 6 is operated within a specific time period from the timing T2 ₂ until the timing T2 _3, the operation state of the operation button 6 is released within a certain time period from the timing T2 ₃ to the timing T2 ₄ . In the third operation, the operation button 6 within a certain period from the timing T2 ₄ until time T3 operation and the releasing of the operation states has been made. In the fourth operation, the operated operation button 6 within a certain period from the timing T2 ₄ to timing T3, are to remain operated until the timing T3 is the end time of the long press operation accepting lifetime.

In the scenario progress effect of the second scenario effect pattern A in the case where the operation such as in the example of FIG. 72 is performed, a certain time period from a particular period and the timing T2 ₁ from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ first operation performed across both periods of is determined to be the long press operation, in response to the timing T2 ₁ to reach a power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to the first gauge. Further, third and fourth operation performed in a specific time period from the timing T2 ₄ to timing T3 is also determined to be a long press operation, in response to the timing T3 to the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to MAX To reach.

  More specifically, at the start timing T2 of the long press operation acceptance valid period in the example of FIG. 72, the determination result of step S3150 in FIG. 70 is YES, and the process proceeds from step S3151 to step S3152 to step S3153 to step S3154. The reception of the long press operation starts. Since the operation button 6 is in a non-operating state from the start timing T2 of the long press operation acceptance valid period until the first operation is performed, NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → step The process from NO in S3174 to step S3155 is repeated.

  When the first operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3156 → YES in step S3157 → step S3158 to press the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c for a long time. An increase in speed begins. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3159 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until a predetermined time (for example, 1/10 of the long-pressing operation acceptance valid period) for which the continuous operation time after the first operation is regarded as long press reaches a predetermined time (YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → The process of NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When the continuous operation time after the first operation reaches a predetermined time that is regarded as long press (for example, 1/10 of the long press operation acceptance valid period), the determination result of step S3161 immediately after that becomes YES, and step S3167 is reached. The speed of increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c is changed from the non-long-pressing progress speed to the long-pressing progress speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3168 to step S3169, NO to step S3174, and step S3155. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _1, the process of NO → step S3155 of NO → step S3174 of NO → step S3169 of NO → step S3160 of NO → step S3157 of YES → Step S3156 in step S3155 is repeated. During this period, increase in the power storage amount in the advancing speed hold proceeds and the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c at the timing T2 ₁ reaches the first gauge, the display color of the power storage amount is changed to blue.

When it is time T2 _1, setting the determination result is YES in the immediately following step S1169, advances processing as YES → Step S3171 → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "second gauge" as the next phase of the gauge progress Is done. Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3174 → YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → YES in step S3157 → YES in step S3158, and the rate of increase in the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c is increased from a long press to a non-long press. Return to speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3159 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until the first operation is released, YES at step S3155 → NO at step S3156 → NO at step S3157 → YES at step S3160 → NO at step S3162 → NO at step S3162 → NO at step S3163 → The process of NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When the first operation is released, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174. Here, in the example of FIG. 72, the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c increases from the time when it reaches the first gauge (timing T2 ₁ ), and the increase in the power accumulation amount at the non-long-pressing progression speed has progressed. traveling velocity hold, since the speed at which the process proceeds gauge one minute between the timing T2 ₁ and T2 _2, power storage amount reaches the stage immediately before the second gauge before the timing T2 _2. Therefore, after the release of the first operation, until the power storage amount reaches the stage immediately before the second gauge, NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → in step S3155. The process is repeated.

When the power accumulation amount in progress at the non-long-pressing progress speed reaches the stage immediately before the second gauge, the determination result in step S3163 immediately after that is YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3164 to step S3165, and the power gauge The progress of the increase in the amount of accumulated power in 82c stops. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3166 to NO in step S3169, NO in step S3174, and step S3155. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _2, processing of NO → step S3155 of NO → step S3174 of NO → step S3169 of NO → step S3163 in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power stops.

When it is time T2 _2, the judgment result of the immediately following step S3169 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "third gauge" is set as the next phase of the gauge progress . Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3174 to step S3155. Thereafter, until the second operation is performed, the process of NO at step S3155 → NO at step S3163 → NO at step S3169 → NO at step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power stops.

When the second operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is YES, NO in step S3156 → YES in step S3157 → step S3158, and the process proceeds and the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c is non-long-pressed. An increase in speed begins. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3159 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _3, in step S3155 YES → Step S3156 NO → of NO → step S3160 in step S3157 YES → Step S3161 NO → step S3162 NO → step S3163 NO → step S3169 NO → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When it is time T2 _3, the determination result of the immediately following step S3169 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "fourth gauge" is set as the next phase of the gauge progress . Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3174 to step S3155. Thereafter, until the second operation is released, YES at step S3155 → NO at step S3156 → NO at step S3157 → YES at step S3160 → NO at step S3161 → NO at step S3162 → NO at step S3163 → The process of NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When the second operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174. Here, in the example of FIG. 72, a time point slightly before even than the timing T2 ₃ for power storage amount that has been stopped just before step begins to increase in the non-long press running speed of the second gauge, non traveling velocity hold, since a gauge one minute proceeds speed between the timing T2 ₃ and T2 _4, does not power storage amount reaches the stage immediately before the fourth gauge before timing T2 _4. Thus, after release of the second operation, until reaching the timing T2 _4, the process of NO → step S3155 of NO → step S3174 of NO → step S3169 of NO → step S3163 in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When it is time T2 _4, the determination result of the immediately following step S3169 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "MAX" is set as the next step of the gauge progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3174 to step S3155. Thereafter, the process of NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → NO in step S3155 is repeated until the third operation is performed. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

  When the third operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is YES, NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → NO at step S3169 → NO at step S3174 → S3155. Thereafter, until the third operation is canceled, YES at step S3155 → NO at step S3156 → NO at step S3157 → YES at step S3160 → NO at step S3161 → NO at step S3162 → NO at step S3163 → The process of NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

  When the third operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until the fourth operation is performed, the process of NO at step S3155 → NO at step S3163 → NO at step S3169 → NO at step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

  When the fourth operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is YES, NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → NO at step S3169 → NO at step S3174 → S3155. Thereafter, until the total time of the continuous operation time of the third operation and the continuous operation time of the fourth operation reaches a predetermined time that is regarded as a long press (for example, 1/10 of the long press operation acceptance valid period) YES at step S3155 → NO at step S3156 → NO at step S3157 → YES at step S3160 → NO at step S3161 → NO at step S3162 → NO at step S3163 → NO at step S3169 → NO at step S3174 → processing at step S3155 Is repeated.

  When the total time of the continuation operation time of the third operation and the continuation operation time of the fourth operation reaches a predetermined time, the determination result in step S3162 immediately after that is YES, and the process proceeds to step S3167 to power in the power gauge 82c. The rate of increase of the accumulation amount changes from the non-long-pressing progress speed to the long-pressing progress speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3168 to step S3169, NO to step S3174, and step S3155. Thereafter, the process of YES at step S3155 → NO at step S3156 → NO at step S3157 → NO at step S3160 → NO at step S3169 → NO at step S3174 → NO at step S3155 until the timing T3 is reached. During this time, the increase in the power accumulation amount at the long press progression speed proceeds, the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c reaches MAX at timing T3, and the display color of the power accumulation amount changes to rainbow.

  73 and 74 are flowcharts showing an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion effect progress process (step S3143 in FIG. 69) when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern B is performed. In this process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation information at each of a plurality of timings set in the long press operation reception valid period, which is one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect. It is determined whether or not it is an indication. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the execution mode of the specific game effect on the condition that the operation button 6 is operated at one timing among the plurality of timings. Details will be described below. When the suggestion effect control process 74 starts the suggestion effect progression process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 waits until the long press operation acceptance valid period starts (NO in step S3180), and when the long press operation acceptance valid period starts (in step S3180). YES), it is confirmed whether the gauge progress flag is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If it is stored, the gauge progress flag in the gauge progress flag area is cleared (step S3181).

After execution of step S3181, the suggestion effect control unit 74 resets the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter in the first storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69d (S3182). After step S3182, suggesting the performance control unit 74 in accordance with progression pattern determined in step S3142, it sets the arrival step of the gauge progress in the period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ (step S3183).

  After execution of step S3183, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts accepting a long press operation by the player (step S3184). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the operation button 6 is in the operation state (step S3185). If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines in step S3185 that the operation button 6 is in the operation state (YES in step S3185), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3186. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in a non-operation state (NO in step S3185), the process proceeds to step S3192.

  In step S <b> 3186, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the current setting period of the corresponding period in the long-press operation acceptance valid period is “no progress”. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the current setting stage of the relevant period is “no progress” (YES in step S3186), the suggestion control unit 74 proceeds to step S3192. If it is determined that the current stage of setting the relevant period is not “no progress” (NO in step S3186), the process proceeds to step S3187.

  In step S3187, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether or not the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c is the gauge progress flag “no set”. If the gauge progress flag is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3187), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3188. If either of the gauge progress flags “1” and “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3187), the process proceeds to step S3190.

  In step S3188, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a command instructing the start of gauge progress at the non-long-pressing progress speed in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c. Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “1” in the gauge progress flag storage area (S3189). After performing step S3189, the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3198.

  In step S3190, the suggestion effect control unit 74 checks whether or not the gauge progress flag “1” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If the gauge progress flag “1” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3190), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3191. If the gauge progress flag “1” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3190), the process proceeds to step S3198.

  In step S 3191, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter in the first storage area of the ON signal count number storage unit 69 d of the RAM 33 c is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in step S 3191 is the half of the specific period within the long press operation acceptance valid period (for example, 1/10 of the long press operation acceptance valid period itself) of the operation signal SGN of the operation button 6. A value obtained by dividing the sampling interval by 2 milliseconds is desirable. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the on-off edge ON signal number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (NO in step S3191), the operation button 6 continues to be pressed for a long time after the start point of the current period. And the process proceeds to step S3192. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the ON / OFF edge ON signal number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (YES in step S3191), the continuous operation time of the operation button 6 after the start point of the current period is long. It is determined that the length that can be determined to be pressed has been reached, and the flow proceeds to step S3196.

  In step S3192, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the previous stage 84e. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the previous stage 84e (YES in step S3192), the suggestion control unit 74 proceeds to step S3193.

  In step S3193, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3194), the suggestion effect control unit 74 instructs to limit the increase in the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a. The command is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3194). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3195). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3194 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the image display device 12 is progressing at a non-long-pressing progress speed. When the image control board 34 receives this command, the image control board 34 stops increasing the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c. The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3198 after executing step S3195. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3193), step S3194 and step S3195 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3198.

  In step S <b> 3196, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a command in the transmission buffer 68 that instructs to increase the accumulated power amount in the power gauge 84 a at the long press progression speed. Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “2” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3197). The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3198 after executing step S3197.

In step S3198, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the immediately preceding determination timing T2a ₁ , T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a ₄ or T3a has been reached. Here, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the immediately preceding determination timings T2a ₁ , T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a ₄ and T3a is a predetermined value immediately before the determination timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ and T3a. It is timing. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the immediately preceding determination timing T2a ₁ , T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a ₄ or T3a has been reached (YES in step S3198), the process proceeds to step S3199. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the previous determination timing T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a _4, or T3a has not been reached (NO in step S3198), the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3199, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3199), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3200. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3199), the process advances to step S3203.

  In step S3200, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the operation button 6 is in the operation state. Specifically, the suggestion effect control unit 74 refers to the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c of the RAM 33c, and “1” is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the operation state, it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state when “0” is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. .

  In step S3200, if the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the operation button 6 is in the operation state (YES in step S3200), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3201. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in a non-operation state (NO in step S3200), the process advances to step S3203.

In step S3201, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 84a for the specific period at timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 which is the end point of the current specific period. The speed to reach the gauge at the stage is set as the long press progress speed, and a command for instructing an increase in the amount of accumulated power at the long press progress speed is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3201). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “2” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3202). The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3208 after executing step S3202.

Here, in the suggestion effect progress process (FIGS. 70 and 71) in the case where the suggestion effect progress process of the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A is performed, the total of the continuous operation times for a plurality of times in the specific period of interest. When the time reaches a predetermined value (when the cumulative ON signal number counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (YES in step S3162 in FIG. 70)), the process proceeds to step S3167 to increase the power accumulation amount in the long press operation progress time. On the other hand, in the suggestion effect progress process when the suggestion effect progress process (FIGS. 73 and 74) of the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern B is performed, the step corresponding to step S3162 of FIG. Instead, the operation button 6 is in the operation state at the determination timing immediately before the end timing of the specific period. Steps S3198, S3199, and S3200 for determining whether or not there is, and when the operation button 6 is in the operation state at the immediately preceding determination timing (YES in Step S3200), the process proceeds to Step S3201 and the long press operation progress time is reached. An increase in the amount of accumulated power is started, and even in such a scenario progress effect suggestion effect progress process based on the second scenario effect pattern B, _{one of} the determination timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ is determined. When it is determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 during a specific period between the predetermined calculation timing immediately before the one determination timing, the long press is performed at the determination timing before the one determination timing. You may perform the same gauge progress process as when the operation was performed. When it is determined that a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in a specific period between the predetermined calculation timing immediately before the determination timing, the specification is performed in the same manner as when the long press effect is executed at the previous timing. The execution mode of the game effect may be changed.

In step S3203, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ has been reached. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has come (YES in step S3203), the process proceeds to step S3204. If it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has not come (NO in step S3203), the process proceeds to step S3208.

  In step S3204, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the gauge progress flag “2” is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the gauge progress flag “2” is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3204), the suggestion control unit 74 proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area and proceeds to step S3206. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is not stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c (NO in step S3204), step S3205 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S3206.

  In step S3206, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the on-off edge on-signal number counter in the first storage area of the on-signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c and the second storage area of the on-signal count number storage unit 69d. Reset the cumulative ON signal number counter.

After execution of step S3206, the suggestion effect control unit 74 follows the progress pattern determined in step S3142, and the gauge in a specific period starting from the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ determined to have reached in step S3203 A progress reaching stage is set (step S3207). The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3208 after executing step S3207. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has not been reached (NO in step S3203), it skips steps S3205, S3206, and S3207, and proceeds to step S3208.

  In step S3208, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the end timing T3 of the long press operation reception valid period has been reached. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the end timing T3 of the long-press operation acceptance valid period has not been reached (NO in step S3208), the suggestion control unit 74 returns to step S3185 and repeats the subsequent processing. In addition, when it is determined that the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has been reached (YES in step S3106), the suggestion effect control unit 74 ends the suggestion effect progress process and returns.

The above suggestion effect progress process will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Figure 76 is a specific period from the traveling patterns 102 (timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ in the development pattern determination process prior to the pressing operation accepting validity period _(T2 0 to T3) (Step S3142) The "first gauge", the timing T2 certain period of from ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ is "second gauge", the specific time period "third gauge" from the timing T2 ₂ until the timing T2 _3, specified period from the timing T2 ₃ to the timing T2 ₄ is "fourth gauge "specified period from the timing T2 ₄ to the time T3 is this the operation of the operation buttons 6 of the long press operation accepting validity period (T2 0 _{to T3)} in the case of traveling pattern for each proceed to" MAX ") is selected It is a figure which shows an example of the change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production | generation 203 according to. The timing of the four operations and the cancellation of the operation state in this example are the same as those in FIG.

In the scenario progress effect of the second scenario effect pattern B in the case where the operation such as in the example of FIG. 76 is performed, similarly to the scenario progression effect of the second scenario the effect pattern A (FIG. 72), the timing from the timing T2 ₀ T2 first operation performed across both periods of a particular time period from a specific period and the timing T2 ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ to ₁ is determined to be the long press operation, the power gauge corresponds to the timing T2 ₁ The amount of power stored in 82c is made to reach the first gauge. Unlike the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A, it was conducted across both periods of a particular time period from a specific period and the timing T2 ₃ from the timing T2 ₂ to the time T2 ₃ to timing T2 ₄ 2 times th operation also is determined to be the long press operation, in response to the timing T2 ₁ to reach a power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to the third gauge. Further, the fourth operation performed in a specific time period from the timing T2 ₄ to timing T3 is also determined to be a long press operation, in response to the timing T3 to reach the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to MAX.

When the scenario progress effect of the second scenario performance pattern A by focusing on differences from the (FIG. 72) (timing T2 ₂ or later) will be described more specifically, particular from the timing T2 ₂ in the example of FIG. 76 to the timing T2 ₃ If an operation is performed during the period, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that is YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3186 → YES in step S3187 → step S3188 to advance the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c by non-long-pressing. The increase in speed begins. Thereafter, the process proceeds in the order of step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until reaching just before the timing T2a ₃ timing T2 _3, in step S3185 YES → of NO → step S3190 of NO → step S3187 in step S3186 YES → Step S3191 NO → step S3192 NO → step S3198 NO → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → Step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When the timing T2a ₃ immediately before the timing T2 ₃ is reached, the determination result in the step S3198 becomes YES, and the process proceeds from NO in the step S3199 → YES in the step S3200 → the step S3201 to increase the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c. Changes from the non-long-pressing speed to the long-pressing speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3201 to step S3208. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _3, in step S3185 YES → Step S3186 NO → of NO → step S3198 of NO → step S3190 in step S3187 YES → Step S3199 YES → Step S3203 NO → step S3208 NO → Step S3185 is repeated. During this period, increase in the power storage amount in the advancing speed hold proceeds and the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c at the timing T2 ₁ reaches the third gauge, display color of the power storage amount is changed to blue.

When it is time T2 _3, the determination result of the immediately following step S3203 becomes to YES, advances processing as YES → Step S3205 → step S3206 → step S3207 in step S3204 "fourth gauge" as the next phase of the gauge progress Is set. After that, the process proceeds from NO in step S3208, NO in step S3185, NO in step S3186, NO in step S3187, and then in step S3188, and the rate of increase in the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c increases from the long press to the non-long press Return to speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3189 to NO in step S3198, NO in step S3203, NO in step S3208, and step S3185. Thereafter, until the second operation is canceled, YES in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → The process of NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When the second operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _4, the process of NO → step S3185 of NO → step S3208 of NO → step S3203 of NO → step S3198 of NO → step S3192 in step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

When it is time T2 _4, the determination result of the immediately following step S3203 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3206 → step S3207 in step S3204 "MAX" is set as the next step of the gauge progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3208 to step S3185. Thereafter, until the third operation is performed, the process of NO at step S3185 → NO at step S3192 → NO at step S3198 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

  When the third operation is performed, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that is YES, NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until the third operation is released, YES at step S3185 → NO at step S3186 → NO at step S3187 → YES at step S3190 → NO at step S3191 → NO at step S3192 → NO at step S3198 → The process of NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

  When the third operation is canceled, the determination result at step S3185 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO at step S3192 → NO at step S3198 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until the fourth operation is performed, the process of NO at step S3185 → NO at step S3192 → NO at step S3198 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the amount of accumulated power at the non-long push progressing speed proceeds.

  When the fourth operation is performed, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that is YES, NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → step S3185. In the example of FIG. 74, the continuous operation time after the fourth operation does not reach the predetermined time that is regarded as a long press by the timing T3a immediately before the timing T3. Therefore, after the fourth operation, until the timing T3a immediately before the timing T3 is reached, YES in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO at step S3198 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → The process at step S3185 is repeated.

  When the timing T3a immediately before the timing T3 is reached, the determination result in step S3198 is YES, the process proceeds from NO in step S3199 → YES in step S3200 → step S3201, and the rate of increase in the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c is not. It changes from long press progress speed to long press progress speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3202 to step S3208. Thereafter, until the timing T3, YES at step S3185 → NO at step S3186 → NO at step S3187 → NO at step S3190 → YES at step S3198 → YES at step S3199 → NO at step S3203 → NO at step S3208 → The process of step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in the power accumulation amount at the long press progression speed proceeds, the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c reaches MAX at timing T3, and the display color of the power accumulation amount changes to rainbow.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the second stage effect control process (step S3105 in FIG. 65). When starting this process, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 205 (step S3300). Thereafter, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the final result notification effect 206 to be performed next to the second stage scenario progress effect 205 is the success effect 207 (step S3301). For example, when the result of the special game determination performed by the special game determination unit 52 is to shift to the special game state ST2, the second stage effect control unit 76 shifts the result of the special game determination to the special game state ST2. It is determined that the success effect 207 has a higher probability than when it is not. As a result, if it is the success effect 207 (YES in step S3301), the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the success effect 207 at the start timing T4 of the success effect 207 (step S3302). On the other hand, when the final result notification effect 206 is not the success effect 207 but the failure effect 208 or 209 (NO in step S3301), the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the failure effect at the start timing T4 of the failure effect 208 or 209. 208 or 209 is started (step S3303). After starting the failure effect 209, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not to perform the resurrection effect 210 (step S3304). As a result, when performing the revival effect 210 (YES in step S3304), the second stage effect control unit 76 waits until the start timing T5 of the revival effect 210 (step S3305), and when the start timing T4 of the revival effect 210 is reached (step S3305). In step S3305, YES), the restoration effect 210 is started (step S3306). If the restoration effect 210 is not performed after the failure effect 209 (NO in step S3304), the processes in steps S3305 and S3306 are skipped. This is the end of the second stage effect control process.

  As described above, when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 is performed on the effect control board 33, the first stage effect control unit 75, the suggestion effect control unit 74, and the second stage effect are displayed on the effect control board 33. The control unit 76 functions in this order. Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 first causes the first stage scenario effect 202 to advance the scenario progress effect to a different first stage according to the timing at which a single press operation on the operation button 6 is received, and the first stage scenario effect 202 is performed. After the one-stage scenario presentation 202, the suggestion presentation control section 74 proceeds from the first stage to the final stage in response to accepting a long press operation on the operation button 6 based on the result of the special game determination. The suggestion effect 203 suggesting the degree of expectation to be performed is performed. Furthermore, after the suggestion effect 203, the second stage effect control unit 76, after the second stage scenario progress effect 205, succeeds the effect 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, and fails to progress to the final stage. Any one of the effects of performing the revival effect 210 after the effect 208 and the failure effect 209 is performed. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 has a higher probability when the result of the special game determination is shifted to the special game state ST2 than when the result of the special game determination is not shifted to the special game state ST2. It is comprised so that the success production 207 may be performed.

  Therefore, when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 is performed, the player expects that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage and the successful effect 207 is performed, and at least the first stage effect control unit When the production by 75 and the suggestion production control unit 74 is being performed, the operation on the operation button 6 is actively performed in order to advance the scenario progression production toward the final stage. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can cause the player to actively perform button operations by performing the scenario progress effect described above based on the second scenario effect pattern 782, and more interesting than ever. It will be possible to produce a high performance.

  As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, you may add the following modifications to this embodiment.

  In the suggestion effect progress processing previously shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the suggestion effect control unit 74 has a plurality of timings set in the long press operation reception valid period which is one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect. When it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state in each of the above, a gauge reaching stage may be set by a gauge stage skip lottery. Here, the “gauge stage skip lottery” is a lottery executed in response to the detection of the operation state of the operation switch 6 at the immediately preceding determination timing, and at least the progress stage of the gauge progress already set according to the progress pattern. This is for resetting the arrival stage so that it can be advanced by one stage. In the following, the gauge stage skip lottery is simply abbreviated as lottery.

  The flowchart of FIG.78 and FIG.79 has shown another example which changed the process sequence of the suggestion effect progress process of FIG. 74 from this viewpoint. The flowchart in FIG. 73 is the same processing procedure in this improved example. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 78 and 79, steps related to the same processes as those in FIG. 74 are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and only different portions are described. As shown in the figure, the suggestion effect control unit 74 reaches the previous determination timing (YES in step S3198), and if the gauge progress flag = 2 (NO in step S3199), the operation switch 6 is in the operating state. (Step S3200), and if it is in the operating state (YES in step S3200), it is determined whether or not the lottery has already been completed (step S3501). Here, the fact that the lottery has already been determined is that the process becomes complicated after the lottery is performed at one of a plurality of immediately preceding determination timings set within the long-press operation acceptance valid period. This is because the re-lottery is not performed at the subsequent immediately preceding determination timing. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the lottery has not been completed (NO in step S3501), the lottery is performed (step S3502), and the reaching stage is set based on the result of the lottery (step S3503). A command for instructing an increase in the power storage amount is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3201). On the other hand, if the lottery has already been completed (step S3501 is YES), steps S3502 and S3503 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3201. The subsequent processing is basically as described above with reference to FIG. 74. However, if it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state at the next immediately preceding determination timing, the next arrival that has already been set without performing the lottery. It differs from the processing described with reference to FIG. 74 in that the gauge progresses to the stage (step S3505).

  According to such a process, when it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state at the immediately preceding determination timing, a lottery is performed when the determination is first made, and an arrival stage is set based on the lottery result, and the arrival stage is set. The power accumulation amount of the power gauge 82c is increased at a long-pressing progress speed. If it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state at the next immediately preceding determination timing, the lottery is not performed, and the gauge progresses to the next reaching stage already set in step S3505. Therefore, since the reaching stage is changed by lottery regardless of the gauge progress pattern, the variety of productions can be enhanced, and productions with high interest can be performed.

The above suggestion effect progress process will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 shows operations in the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3) when the progress pattern 102 is selected in the progress pattern determination process (S3142) prior to the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). It is a figure which shows an example of operation of the button 6 and the change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production | generation 203 according to this. In the example of FIG. 80, four operations of the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T2 0 _{to T3)} have been made. Since each operation is the same as the operation described above with reference to FIG. 76, the description thereof is omitted here.

Here, the description will focus on the characteristic determination at each immediately preceding determination timing. Between specific time period _T2 0 to T2 _1, when having reached just before determining the timing _{T2 a1} is already underway gauge progress in advancing speed hold, since a gauge progress flag = 2, exits to YES in step S3199 The lottery is not performed, and the amount of accumulated gauge is increased at a long pressing speed until the first gauge is reached. In the specific period T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , when the previous determination timing T2 _a2 is reached, the increase in the power accumulation amount is stopped and the gauge progress flag is cleared, so that YES in step S3198 → NO in step S3199 → Proceed to step S3200. When the leading immediately before the determination timing T2 _a2, the operation switch 6 is not a operation state, it passes through the step S3200 to NO, never lottery is performed, an increase in power storage amount in the previous stage of the second gauge Stay stopped.

During the specific period T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , when the immediately preceding determination timing T2 _a3 is reached, the increase in the accumulated amount of the gauge at the non-long-pressing advance speed has already been advanced, and the gauge progress flag is set to 1. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S3198 YES to step S3199 NO to step S3200. When the leading immediately before the determination timing _{T2 a3,} since the operation switch 6 is in the operation state, the process proceeds NO → step S3502 → step S3503 of YES → Step S3501 in step S3200, the drawing is performed, based on the lottery result The arrival stage is set. In this example, the reaching stage is advanced by one stage by lottery and set to the fourth gauge. Thereafter, the accumulated amount of the gauge is increased with the long press advance speed to the set fourth gauge, and the display color of the accumulated power amount is changed to red when reaching. Thereafter, when reaching the timing T2 ₃ is reached step in step S3504 is set in the next step (MAX) irrespective of the gauge progression pattern.

Between specific time period T2 ₃ to T2 _4, when reaches just before determining the timing T2 _a4 is stopped after an increase in the power storage amount is being advanced to the stage immediately before the MAX to reach it, the gauge progress flag is cleared Thus, the process proceeds from step S3198 YES to step S3199 NO to step S3200. When the leading immediately before the determination timing T2 _a4, the operation switch 6 is not a operation state, passes through the step S3200 to NO, never lottery is performed, an increase of the power storage amount is stopped just before the stage of MAX Will remain. Then, among the specific period T2 4 _{to T3,} when reached just before determining the timing T3 _a has already been initiated increase in power storage amount in the traveling speed hold, since a gauge progress flag = 2, step S3199 is cleared to YES, the lottery is not performed, and the gauge accumulation amount at the progressing speed is increased until MAX is reached, and when the MAX is reached, the display color of the power accumulation amount changes to rainbow color Is done.

  Further, in the suggestion effect progression processing previously shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a plurality of long press operation reception valid periods that are one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect. When it is determined that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation switch 6 in a specific period between the one timing and a predetermined calculation timing immediately before the one timing at one of the timings of The same processing as when a predetermined operation was performed at a timing before the one timing is performed, but the above-described “gauge stage skip lottery” may also be performed when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed. .

  The flowcharts of FIGS. 81 and 82 show another example in which the processing procedure of FIG. 71 is changed from this viewpoint. Here, the flowchart of FIG. 70 is the same processing procedure in this improved example. In the flowcharts of FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, the same reference numerals are given to the steps related to the same processing as the steps of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a predetermined operation on the operation switch 6 during a specific period, that is, a long press operation here (YES in step S3161 in FIG. 70). If YES in step S3162, it is determined whether there is an effect that has not been reached (step S3511). If there is an effect that has not been reached (YES in step S3511), it is determined whether or not a lottery has already been completed (step S3511). S3512). Here, it is determined whether or not the lottery has already been performed. After the lottery is performed in one of a plurality of specific periods set within the long-press operation acceptance valid period, it is avoided that the process becomes complicated. Therefore, the re-lottery is not performed in the subsequent specific period. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 is not already drawn (NO in step S3512), it performs a lottery (step S3513), sets a reaching stage based on the result of the lottery (step S3514), and reaches the reaching stage. A command for instructing an increase in the amount of accumulated power at the long press progression speed is set in the transmission buffer (step S3167). On the other hand, if there is no effect that has not been reached (NO in step S3511), or if it has already been drawn (YES in step S3512), the process skips steps S3513 and S3514 and proceeds to step S3167. The subsequent processing is basically as described above with reference to FIG. 71. However, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed in the next specific period, the lottery is not performed and the next set arrival stage is reached. It differs from the processing described with reference to FIG. 71 in that the gauge progresses (step S3515).

  According to such processing, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation switch 6 in a specific period between one determination timing and a predetermined calculation timing immediately before the one determination timing, When there is an unreachable performance, a lottery is performed, a reaching stage is set based on the lottery result, a gauge is advanced at a long press speed to reach the reaching stage, and a display color of the power storage amount is changed. Become. If it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed in the next specific period, since the lottery has already been performed, the lottery is not performed, and the gauge progresses to the next reaching stage already set in step S3515. The display color of will be changed.

For example, in certain period from the start timing T2 ₀ until the determination timing T2 ₁ long press operation is performed after changing the display color of the power storage amount in the blue with the progress of the gauge to the first gauge, determined from the determination timing T2 ₁ is not the long press operation in a specified period from the timing T2 _2, when the long press operation is a specific time period from the subsequent determination timing T2 ₂ until the determination timing T2 _3, predetermined lottery is performed, the arrival phase first Set the display color of the power accumulation amount to yellow or more, and perform gauge advance at a long press speed that reaches the reaching stage. Then, when a long press operation is performed in a specific period from the subsequent determination timing T2 ₃ to the determination timing T2 _4, since the lottery has already been completed, the lottery is not performed, and the gauge progresses at the long press speed so as to reach the next reaching stage. And the display color of the power storage amount is changed. Therefore, since the reaching stage is changed by lottery regardless of the gauge progress pattern, the variety of productions can be enhanced, and productions with high interest can be performed.

The above suggestion effect progress process will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 shows a period within the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3) when the progress pattern 102 is selected in the progress pattern determination process (step S3142) prior to the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). It is a figure which shows an example of the operation of the operation button 6, and the change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production 203 according to this. In the example of FIG. 83, the operation button 6 is operated five times during the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). The first and second operation is the same as the operation explained in FIG. 72 above, after the second operation, a continuous operation time regarded as long-pressing operation between the timing T2 ₃ timing T2 ₄ This is different from the operation described in FIG. 72 in that the third operation is performed.

Here, the characteristic processing performed between the timings T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ shown in FIG. 83 will be mainly described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 70, 81, and 82 as appropriate. When the third operation is performed, YES in step S3155 until the continuation operation time after the third operation reaches a predetermined time regarded as a long press operation (1/10 of the long press operation reception valid period). → NO at Step S3156 → NO at Step S3157 → YES at Step S3160 → NO at Step S3161 → NO at Step S3162 → NO at Step S3163 → NO at Step S3169 → NO at Step S3174 → Step S3155 is repeated. Then, when the continuation operation time after the third operation reaches a predetermined time regarded as a long press operation, the process proceeds from step S3162 YES → step S3511 YES → step S3512 NO → step S3513 → step S3514. Is set. In this example, the reaching stage set for the fourth gauge is set to MAX based on the lottery result. Then, the process proceeds to step S3167, and an increase in the amount of accumulated power is started at the long press advance speed up to MAX. As a result, the power storage amount of the power gauge to time point T2 ₄ reaches the MAX, the display color of the power storage amount is varied in rainbow colors.

Here, the “gage progress at the long press progress speed” (step S3167) of the suggestion effect progress process in FIG. 81 includes changing to an unachieved effect mode by shortening the time. That is, when it is determined that a predetermined long press operation is performed at one timing among a plurality of timings, there is an unreachable effect mode that is not executed at another timing before the one timing The time may be changed to an unreachable effect mode. For example, a long press operation at a specific period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ is, after changing the display color of the power storage amount in the blue with allowed to proceed to the first gauge, followed by a specified period of time T2 ₁ to T2 ₂ When the long press operation is not performed in the specific period from the timing T2 _{2 to} T2 _{3 and in} the specific period from the timing T2 ₃ to the timing T2 _4, and the long press operation is performed again in the specific period from the timing T2 ₄ to the timing T3. Alternatively, the gauge stage skip lottery may be performed, the reaching stage may be set to MAX, the display color of the power storage amount may be set to rainbow, and the gauge may be advanced at a long press speed so as to reach the reaching stage. In this case, as the gauge the progress of long press speed when it is long press operation at a particular period from the timing T2 ₄ until time T3 is, the second gauge → third gauge → shortened fourth gauge → MAX and the gauge time The production mode may be changed so that the display color of the power accumulation amount changes from green to yellow to red to rainbow when the gauge reaches each gauge. Such an effect is suitable as a suggestion when the result of the special game determination is a transition to the special game state ST2.

In addition, the “gage progress at the long press progress speed” (step S3167) of the suggestion effect progress process in FIG. 81 includes performing an effect that does not change to the unreachable effect mode. That is, when a predetermined long press operation is performed at one timing among a plurality of timings, when there is an unreachable presentation mode that is not executed at another timing before the one timing, the unreached You may perform the production which is not changed to the production mode. For example, a long press operation at a specific period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ is, after changing the display color of the power storage amount in the blue with the progress of the gauge to the first gauge, the timing T2 ₂ from subsequent time T2 ₁ If the long press operation is not performed during the specific period until the next specific period of timing T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , the display proceeds to the third gauge and the display color of the power storage amount becomes yellow. As a change stage, the progress to the second gauge and the display color of the power storage amount may be set to green as the reaching stage, and the gauge may be advanced at a long pressing speed so as to reach the reaching stage. Then, it followed if long press operation at a particular period from the timing T2 ₄ until time T3 is, performs gauge step skip lottery, set the arrival phase fourth gauge and higher, the display color of the power storage amount in the above red, An increase in consideration of power accumulation at a long pressing speed that reaches the reaching stage may be advanced. That is, until the timing T2 ₄ suppresses the progress of the gauge, it is possible to perform an effect such that recover it when the long press operation at a specific period until the timing T3 has been. Such an effect is suitable as a suggestion when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2.

  In the present embodiment, the operation button 6 having the movable body 6a is used as an operation member. However, instead of the operation button 6 or the movable body 6a, a lever, a handle, a grip, a rotating member, a slide member, a touch panel is used. An optical sensor or the like may be used as the operation member.

  In this embodiment, a so-called pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a so-called pachislot gaming machine.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control board 33 progresses the scenario effect based on the change start command transmitted from the main control board 30, but a special game start command (big hit start command), a customer waiting demo command, etc. The scenario effect may be advanced based on another type of command. In this case, the determination of the long press operation, the single press operation, and the continuous press operation based on the operation signal of the operation means in the progress of the scenario effect may be performed in the same manner as the above embodiment.

  In addition, the number of specific periods in which the start point and the end point are determined by the timings that follow each other among the plurality of timings set in the long-press operation acceptance valid period described above is limited to the above-described five as long as it is two or more. There is no. In addition, the lengths of the plurality of specific periods do not necessarily have to be equal for all the specific periods, and all or some of the lengths of the plurality of specific periods may be different. Further, the plurality of timings set in the long press operation acceptance valid period or the like may be variable, for example, in addition to being set in advance, the timing when the operation button is operated by the player is set as the initial timing.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 6 Operation button 8 Speaker 9 Frame lamp 14 Movable accessory 14a Board surface lamp 12 Image display device 13 Sub display device 30 Main control board 31 Sub control board 33 Production control board 33a CPU
33c RAM
36 presentation device 50 game control unit 52 special game determination unit 65 presentation control unit 66 operation control unit 67 reception buffer 68 transmission buffer 69 operation signal storage unit 69a sampling signal storage unit 69b edge storage unit 69c on-edge count number storage unit 69d on signal Count number storage
70 effect pattern determining unit 71 normal game control unit 73 scenario progress effect control unit 74 suggestion effect control unit 75 first stage effect control unit 76 second stage effect control unit

Claims (1)

A main control unit for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting a command according to the progress of the game;
An effect control unit that determines an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit, and causes the effect device to execute the determined effect;
An operation means that can be operated by the player and that detects an operation status related to the operation by the player;
An operation control means for processing the operation status detected from the operation means as operation information,
The operation information is information that can at least determine that the operation means is operated,
The effect control unit includes an edge storage unit that stores, as the operation information, information indicating that the operation unit has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state or from an operation state to a non-operation state, and the operation unit An on-signal count number storage unit that stores information related to the time during which the operation is continued as the operation information,
The production control unit can update the operation information in the edge storage unit and the ON signal count number storage unit at every sampling timing of a certain interval,
The production control unit indicates that at least the operation information at the start time of a predetermined operation reception valid period indicates that the operation means is not operated by a player, and one or more after the start time When the operation information at the time indicates that the operation means is operated by the player, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time as if the original operation was performed, and a stage progress effect Causing the effect device to execute an effect of proceeding to a predetermined stage,
The effect control unit indicates that the operation information at the start time point indicates that the operation means is operated by a player, and the operation information at one or more time points after the start time point is a player Indicates that the operation means is being operated, whether or not the operation information at the end of the operation acceptance valid period indicates that the player has not been operated, The operation information is processed in association with the operation time on the assumption that an irregular operation different from the original operation has been performed, and the effect device does not execute the effect of advancing the stage progress effect to a predetermined level. And
The production control unit writes a first value as operation information when the operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state at each sampling timing, and the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. An on-edge count number storage unit in which a second value different from the first value is written as operation information when
The production control unit refers to a value in the on-edge count number storage unit to determine whether or not the operation means is continuously operated within the operation reception valid period .